an113stud

V7.0

cover

Front cover

Power Systems for AIX I: LPAR Configuration and Planning (Course code AN11)

Student Notebook ERC 3.0

Student Notebook

Trademarks The reader should recognize that the following terms, which appear in the content of this training document, are official trademarks of IBM or other companies: IBM® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. The following are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, or other countries, or both: Active Memory BladeCenter

AIX 6 developerWorks

Express

Focal Point

OS/400 Power Systems Software PowerPC POWER6 Resource Link System p5

POWER Hypervisor Power PowerVM POWER7 System i System z

AIX EnergyScale IBM Systems Director Active Energy Manager Power Systems PowerHA POWER6+ Redbooks System p

Intel is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both. Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries. Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other product and service names might be trademarks of IBM or other companies.

May 2012 edition The information contained in this document has not been submitted to any formal IBM test and is distributed on an “as is” basis without any warranty either express or implied. The use of this information or the implementation of any of these techniques is a customer responsibility and depends on the customer’s ability to evaluate and integrate them into the customer’s operational environment. While each item may have been reviewed by IBM for accuracy in a specific situation, there is no guarantee that the same or similar results will result elsewhere. Customers attempting to adapt these techniques to their own environments do so at their own risk.

© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2009, 2012. This document may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM. Note to U.S. Government Users — Documentation related to restricted rights — Use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.

V7.0 Student Notebook

TOC

Contents Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi Course description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii Agenda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 What is a partition? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Physical partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Logical partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Partition characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Partition resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 LPAR resource example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 IBM POWER6 LPAR-capable systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 IBM POWER7 LPAR-capable systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Benefits of using partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Software licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 POWER Hypervisor functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Hardware Management Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 The big picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Advanced partition features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 Dynamic partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 How DLPAR works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Processor concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 Micro-partitioning: Shared processor pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27 Multiple shared processor pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28 Virtual I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29 Virtual I/O example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31 Integrated Virtual Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33 IVE example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34 Active Memory Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35 Live Partition Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36 Capacity on demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37 PowerVM editions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39 Partitioning concepts: Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41 Integrated Virtualization Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42 LPAR configuration process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43 LPAR references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45 AN11 course content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46 Checkpoint (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47 Checkpoint (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48 Checkpoint (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49 Exercise: Introduction to partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Contents

iii

Student Notebook

Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-51 Unit 2. Hardware system overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2 IBM POWER6 processor-based systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3 POWER7 system highlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6 POWER7 processor chip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 POWER7 modes: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9 POWER7 modes for AIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11 POWER7 TurboCore mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 EnergyScale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 POWER7 offerings: Express versus Enterprise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Power Blade Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 Power Blade Express at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18 Power 710 and 730 Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19 Power 710 Express at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20 Power 730 Express at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21 Power 710 / 730 Express: Rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22 Power 720 / 740 Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23 Power 720 Express at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24 Power 740 Express at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25 Power 740 Express: Rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26 Power 750 Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27 Power 750 Express at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28 Power 750 Express: Front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29 Power 750: Rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30 Power 750 Express: Split backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31 I/O drawer availability for Power 710/720/730/740/750 Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32 Power 755 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33 Power 755 at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34 Power 755 HPC cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35 Power 770 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36 Power 770 at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37 Power 775 supercomputing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38 Power 775 supercomputing at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39 Power 780 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40 Power 780 at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41 Power 770/780: Front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42 Power 770/780: Rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43 Power 795 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44 Power 795 at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45 Power 795 layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46 Power 795 processor / memory book node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47 I/O drawer availability for Power 755/770/780/795 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48 I/O drawer example: 12X I/O Drawer PCI-X DDR (#5796) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49 I/O drawer example: 12X I/O Drawer PCIe, SFF disk (#5802) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50 I/O location codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51 Physical location code convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52 iv

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

TOC

View location codes: From the HMC GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View location codes: From AIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flexible service processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advanced System Management interface (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advanced System Management interface (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASMI example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: System hardware components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-53 2-54 2-55 2-56 2-57 2-58 2-59 2-60 2-61 2-62

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 3.1. HMC overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Topic 1 objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Power Systems Management Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Hardware Management Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Latest available HMCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 HMC connection to the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 HMC: Managed System and LPAR communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Configuring a new HMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 HMC V7 web UI: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 HMC pre-login welcome screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 HMC login sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Disconnect versus logoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Reconnecting to login session (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Reconnecting to login session (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 HMC Welcome screen after login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 HMC V7 user interface: Overall structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Flexibility: Launching tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Server table view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 LPAR table view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 LPAR consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 HMC online help and documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 HMC V7 documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Work area: Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Toolbar features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31 Flexibility: Filtering columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 Flexibility: Sort options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 Flexibility: Custom groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34 Status Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35 SRC lookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 HMC Management: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 Systems Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 System Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39 Service Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40 Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 User settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42 © Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Contents

v

Student Notebook

HMC network configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43 HMC network options: Local HMC (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45 HMC network options: Local HMC (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47 FSP network options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49 Local single HMC with redundant FSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-50 Local redundant HMCs network configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51 Redundant remote HMC configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-52 Set up HMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-53 Configure HMC: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-55 Logon panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-56 Setup wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-57 Guided Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-58 Display prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-59 Set date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-60 Change passwords: hscroot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-61 Change passwords: root . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-62 Add HMC users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-63 Completion checkpoint message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-65 Network settings: HMC identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-66 Network settings: LAN Adapters (1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-67 Network settings: LAN Adapters (2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-68 Network settings: LAN Adapters (3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-70 Network settings: LAN Adapters (4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-71 Network settings: LAN firewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-73 Network settings: Name Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-75 Network settings: Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-76 HMC TCP/IP relationship to FSP (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-78 HMC TCP/IP relationship to FSP (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-80 Completion checkpoint message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-82 Contact information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-83 Email notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-84 Configuration completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-85 Reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-86 After reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-87 First connection to a managed system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-88 HMC TCP/IP relationship to FSP (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-89 HMC TCP/IP relationship to FSP (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-90 Success . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-91 Local versus remote HMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-92 View HMC Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-93 Shut Down or Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-94 Schedule Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-95 Change Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-96 Test Network Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-97 Change User Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-98 Change Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-99 Launch Guided Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-100 Welcome text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-101 vi

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

TOC

Add Managed System (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Managed System (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Managed System (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing the server or HMC connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check managed system status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check HMC software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Topic 1: Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2. HMC users, remote access, and security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Topic 2: HMC users, remote access, and security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMC user management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change User Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add or manage HMC users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add an HMC user (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add an HMC user (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMC users: Resources and task roles example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Task roles management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add task role example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managed resource roles management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add managed resource role example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMC remote access options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote CLI access: Secure Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote web access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Browser settings: Firefox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Browser settings: Internet Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMC firewall settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote logon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling remote browser access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enable or disable remote options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using remote HMC commands (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using remote HMC commands (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SSH login environment on the HMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMC CLI: What is available then? (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMC CLI: What is available then? (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote access security: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Topic 2: Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Exploring the HMC V7 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-102 3-103 3-104 3-105 3-107 3-109 3-110 3-111 3-112 3-113 3-114 3-115 3-116 3-119 3-120 3-121 3-122 3-123 3-124 3-125 3-126 3-127 3-128 3-129 3-130 3-131 3-132 3-133 3-134 3-135 3-136 3-137 3-138 3-140 3-142 3-143 3-144 3-145 3-146 3-147

Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The major maintenance components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup critical console data (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup critical console data (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup critical console data (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling backups (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . © Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Contents

4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-6 4-7 4-8 vii

Student Notebook

Scheduling backups (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9 Check HMC code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10 HMC update methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11 HMC corrective service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12 HMC Corrective Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14 Fix Central: Select HMC fixes (1 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16 Fix Central: Select HMC fixes (2 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17 Fix Central: Select HMC fixes (3 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18 Fix Central: Select HMC fixes (4 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19 Fix Central: Select HMC fixes (5 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20 HMC software upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21 Prepare for HMC software upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23 HMC reload procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24 Managed system firmware update (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26 Managed system firmware update (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27 Examine current firmware level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28 Obtaining new firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29 Change LIC for current release (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30 Change LIC for current release (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32 Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33 Exercise: HMC and managed system maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35 Unit 5. System power management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2 Managed system power states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3 Managed system power on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5 Managed system power on options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6 Power on: Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7 Power on: System Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9 Power on: Hardware Discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 System initialization (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11 System initialization (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Power Off managed system (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Power off managed system (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Exercise: System power management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2 Partition environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3 Partition resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4 Dividing the system resources (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5 Dividing the system resources (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6 Creating partitions and profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8 Memory resources (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9 viii

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

TOC

Memory resources (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory usage (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory usage (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processor resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Virtual SCSI devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Virtual Ethernet options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a logical partition: System state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create logical partition wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Partition ID and name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Profile name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set processor type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure dedicated processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure shared processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure I/O slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Virtual I/O adapters setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logical Host Ethernet Adapter (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logical Host Ethernet Adapter (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logical Host Ethernet Adapter (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Host Channel Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check logical partition Profile Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a partition's configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional configuration options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Configuring logical partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-10 6-11 6-12 6-14 6-15 6-16 6-17 6-18 6-19 6-20 6-21 6-23 6-24 6-25 6-26 6-27 6-28 6-30 6-31 6-32 6-33 6-34 6-36 6-37 6-38 6-39 6-40 6-41 6-42

Unit 7. Partition operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Web-based user interface: Systems Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Activating partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Activate partitions with a system profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Activating an individual partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Activating with open terminal window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Terminal window: Normal boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Activating with advanced options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 Open or close a terminal window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 Stopping a partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 Partition shutdown options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 Create a system profile (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 Create a system profile (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 Validate allocations with a system profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 Change the default partition profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22 Managing partition profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23 Save configuration in a partition profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24 © Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Contents

ix

Student Notebook

Delete a partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-25 Backing up partition profile data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-26 Restoring partition profile data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-27 Managing backup files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-28 Backup and restore from the HMC CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-29 Scheduling operations (1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-30 Scheduling operations (2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-31 Scheduling operations (3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-32 Scheduling operations (4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-33 Troubleshooting activation failures (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-34 Troubleshooting activation failures (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-35 Troubleshooting activation failures (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-36 Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-37 Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-38 Exercise: Partition operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-39 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-40 Unit 8. Dynamic LPAR infrastructure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2 Dynamic logical partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3 DLPAR operations overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4 How DLPAR works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 DLPAR operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6 Dedicated processor operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 Shared processing units operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8 Move memory operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 Add I/O slots operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10 AIX commands for I/O operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11 Removing I/O slots in AIX (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12 Removing I/O slots in AIX (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13 Remove I/O slots operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14 DLPAR status (1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15 DLPAR status (2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16 DLPAR status (3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17 DLPAR status (4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18 DLPAR troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19 List resources with lshwres command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20 chhwres HMC command for DLPAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21 Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22 Exercise: Dynamic resource allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24 Appendix A. Checkpoint solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

x

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

TMK

Trademarks The reader should recognize that the following terms, which appear in the content of this training document, are official trademarks of IBM or other companies: IBM® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. The following are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, or other countries, or both: Active Memory™ BladeCenter®

AIX 6™ developerWorks®

Express®

Focal Point™

OS/400® Power Systems Software™ PowerPC® POWER6® Resource Link® System p5®

POWER Hypervisor™ Power® PowerVM® POWER7® System i® System z®

AIX® EnergyScale™ IBM Systems Director Active Energy Manager™ Power Systems™ PowerHA® POWER6+™ Redbooks® System p®

Intel is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both. Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries. Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other product and service names might be trademarks of IBM or other companies.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Trademarks

xi

Student Notebook

xii

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

pref

Course description Power Systems for AIX I: LPAR Configuration and Planning Duration: 3 days Purpose Learn how to perform system administration in a Power Systems environment. Learn about the features of PowerVM Editions and how to configure and manage LPARs running AIX V7.1 using the Hardware Management Console (HMC).

Audience This course is appropriate for system administrators, technical support individuals, and IBM business partners who implement LPARs on IBM Power Systems.

Prerequisites This introductory course does not require any logical partitioning experience. General TCP/IP knowledge is strongly recommended. This prerequisite can be met by attending TCP/IP for AIX System Administrators (AN21).

Objectives After completing this course, you should be able to: • Describe important concepts associated with managing POWER7 processor-based systems, such as logical partitioning, dynamic partitioning, virtual devices, virtual processors, virtual consoles, virtual local area network (VLAN), and shared processors • Describe the features of the PowerVM editions • Use the System Planning Tool to plan an LPAR configuration • Describe the functions of the HMC • Configure and manage the HMC, including users and permissions, software, startup and shutdown, remote access features, network configuration, security features, HMC backup and restore options, and the HMC reload procedure

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Course description

xiii

Student Notebook

• Describe the rules associated with allocating resources, including dedicated processors, processing units for micro-partitions, memory, logical host Ethernet adapter, and physical I/O for AIX and Linux partitions • Configure and manage LPARs using the HMC graphical user interface (GUI) and HMC commands • Interpret physical and AIX location codes and relate to the key hardware components • Power on and power off the POWER7-based system • Use the HMC to back up and restore partition data • Perform dynamic LPAR operations

xiv

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

pref

Agenda Day 1 Welcome Unit 1: Introduction to partitioning Exercise 1: Introduction to partitioning Unit 2: Hardware system overview Exercise 2: System hardware components Unit 3: Hardware Management Console

Day 2 Unit 3: Hardware Management Console (continued) Exercise 3: Exploring the HMC V7 interface Unit 4: Hardware Management Console maintenance Exercise 4: HMC and managed system maintenance Unit 5: System power management Exercise 5: System power management Unit 6: Planning and configuring logical partitions

Day 3 Unit 6: Planning and configuring logical partitions (continued) Exercise 6: Configuring logical partitions Unit 7: Partition operations Exercise 7: Partition operations Unit 8: Dynamic LPAR infrastructure Exercise 8: Dynamic resource allocation

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Agenda

xv

Student Notebook

xvi

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning What this unit is about This unit introduces basic partitioning concepts and features on IBM POWER6, and POWER7 processor-based servers.

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Describe the following terms: - Partition, logical partition (LPAR), resource • Describe the following partition concepts: - Dynamic logical partitioning - Micro-partitioning - Shared processor pool - Virtual I/O - Live Partition Mobility (LPM) - Capacity on demand (CoD) • Describe the functions of the Hardware Management Console (HMC) • Describe the functions performed by the POWER Hypervisor • Describe the overall process for configuring partitions • List references for IBM POWER6 and POWER7 processor-based system partitioning

How you will check your progress • Checkpoint questions • Machine exercises

References http://publib16.boulder.ibm.com/pseries/index.htm  IBM System p and AIX Information Center SG247940

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

IBM PowerVM Virtualization Introduction and Configuration Redbook

Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-1

Student Notebook

Unit objectives IBM Power Systems

After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Describe the following terms: – Partition, logical partition (LPAR), resource

• Describe the following partition concepts: – Dynamic logical partitioning – Micro-partitioning – Shared processor pool – Virtual I/O – Live Partition Mobility (LPM) – Capacity on demand (CoD)

• Describe the functions of the Hardware Management Console (HMC) • Describe the functions performed by the POWER Hypervisor • Describe the overall process for configuring partitions • List references for IBM POWER6 and POWER7 processor-based system partitioning © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-1. Unit objectives

AN113.0

Notes: The objectives list what you should be able to do at the end of this unit.

1-2

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

What is a partition? IBM Power Systems

• A partition is the end result of partitioning. • Partitioning is the process of subdividing the HW resources of a computer system into multiple smaller independent environments over which an operating system can be hosted. • A partition is a full fledged node with its own system resources.

From one to many.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-2. What is a partition?

AN113.0

Notes: Partition When a computer system is subdivided into multiple, independent operating system images, those independent operating environments are called partitions. The resources on the system are divided among the partitions. Applications running on a partitioned system do not have to be redesigned for the partitioned environment. Independent operating environment Each partition runs its own operating system that might or might not match operating systems in other partitions on the same system. Each partition can be started and stopped independently of other partitions.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-3

Student Notebook

Physical partition IBM Power Systems

• Physical partition: – Resources are allocated in physical building blocks. – Blocks contain groups of processors, memory, and I/O slots. Interconnect

SMP building block

SMP building block

Operating system CPU, memory, and I/O

CPU, memory, and I/O

Physical partition

SMP building block

Operating system CPU, memory, and I/O

Physical partition

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-3. Physical partition

AN113.0

Notes: This page defines physical partitioning, which we will contrast with logical partitioning on the next visual. IBM Power Systems support logical partitions (LPARs), not physical partitions (PPARs). PPARs The visual shows an example of a system with three system building blocks, each made up of a number of processors, an amount of memory, and a number of I/O slots. These three building blocks can be configured into one, two, or three partitions, each made up of one or more entire building blocks. The size of the building blocks depends on the vendor and system model. Adding or removing resources To add or remove resources in a PPAR environment, entire building blocks must be added or removed. For example, if more memory is needed, you might have to add more processors and I/O slots.

1-4

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Logical partition IBM Power Systems

• A partition is the allocation of system resources to create logically separate systems within the same physical footprint. • A logical partition exists when the isolation is implemented with firmware: – Not based on physical system building block. – Provides configuration flexibility. SYS1

SYS2

SYS3

SYS4

1:00 Japan

10:00 USA

11:00 Brazil

12:00 UK

AIX 6

IBM i

AIX 7 Linux

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-4. Logical partition

AN113.0

Notes: Logical partitioning is the ability to make a single system run as if it were two or more systems. Each partition represents a division of resources in your computer system. The partitions are logical because the division of resources is virtual and not along physical boundaries. There are, however, configuration rules that must be followed. For the rest of the course, logical partitions will be called LPARs or partitions for brevity. Implemented in firmware The system uses firmware to allocate resources to partitions and manage the access to those resources. Although there are configuration rules, the granularity of the units of resources that can be allocated to partitions is very flexible. You can add just a small amount of memory (if that is all that is needed) without a dependency on the size of the memory cards and without having to add more processors or I/O slots that are not needed. Firmware refers to underlying software running on a system independently from any operating system. On IBM Power Systems, this includes the System firmware, Device firmware, and HMC Firmware. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-5

Student Notebook

Partition characteristics IBM Power Systems

• Each partition has its own: – Operating system – Licensed Internal Code (LIC) and Open Firmware – Console – Resources – Other things expected in a stand-alone operating system environment, such as: • Problem logs • Data (libraries, objects, file systems) • Performance characteristics • Network identity • Date and time

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-5. Partition characteristics

AN113.0

Notes: Characteristics of a partition The visual illustrates how each partition is independent. As stated before, each partition runs its own operating system. The version of the operating system can be any valid version that is supported on the system. Other things you would expect on a physically separate system are also separate for partitions. There are even independent virtual consoles. What is the same between partitions on the same system? Each partition shares a few physical system attributes, such as the system serial number, system model, and processor feature code with other partitions. In addition, you can choose to share other hardware, such as Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) devices, among partitions. The planar in an I/O drawer is also an example of a component that is used by all LPARs that use an adapter on that planar.

1-6

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Partition resources IBM Power Systems

• Resources are allocated to partitions: – Memory allocated in units as small as the LMB size – Dedicated whole processors or shared processing units – Individual I/O slots • Including virtual devices

• Some resources can be shared. – Virtual devices – Host Ethernet adapter

• Some core system components are inherently shared. AIX PPPPP MMM SSSS

Linux PP MM SSSS

AIX PPP MM SSSS S = I/O slot M = Memory P = Processor

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-6. Partition resources

AN113.0

Notes: Resources Resources are the system components that are configured into partitions. The maximum number of partitions depends on system model and the total amount of resources on the system. For example, a system with eight processors can be configured with a total of 80 partitions (if there are sufficient resources). If a system has enough resources, the upper limit is 1024 partitions. Minimum amount of resources Each partition must be configured with at least 256 MB of memory, one tenth of a physical processor, and enough I/O devices to provide a boot disk and a connection to a network. Memory Memory is allocated in units known as the logical memory block (LMB). The default LMB size is variable, depending on the total amount of physical memory installed, and might be as small as 16 MB.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-7

Student Notebook

Processors A partition is configured with either dedicated whole processors or shared processors. Shared processors are allocated in processing units. 1.0 processing units is equivalent to the processing power of one processor. Partitions are configured with at least 0.1 processing units or with as much as the equivalent of all the available physical processors. After the 0.1 minimum is satisfied, additional processing units can be allocated in quantities of 0.01 processing units. I/O slots I/O resources are allocated to partitions at the slot level. At a minimum, you must configure a partition with enough I/O resources to include the boot disk and a network connection. Shared devices With software called the Virtual I/O Server (VIOS) installed in a special partition, Ethernet and storage devices can be configured to be shared between partitions. Secure environments and shared I/O Highly secure environments can choose not to take full advantage of the cross-partition sharing of devices. Even subtle visibility (for example, different response times from a shared resource) can be considered a covert channel of communication. For this reason, by design, all shared or virtual resources must be consciously enabled. Shared core resources Some devices can be shared because they are core resources to the entire system. For example, even though you have allocated separate amounts of memory to different partitions, that memory can be on the same memory card. Likewise, processors, I/O drawers, and other core system components are shared. Because of this, a hardware failure might bring down more than one partition and could potentially bring down the entire system; however, there are many fault containment, in-line recovery, and redundancy features of the system to minimize unrecoverable failures.

1-8

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

LPAR resource example IBM Power Systems

• Flexibility to allocate resources depending on need. • With DLPAR operations, resources can be moved, removed, or added with a restarting the partition. LPAR 1

LPAR 2

LPAR 3

LPAR 4

Processors

Memory I/O slots

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-7. LPAR resource example

AN113.0

Notes: This visual shows how a system’s resources might be divided among four partitions. With LPARs, resources can be allocated based on computing needs. You do not need to allocate all resources to partitions; that is, some resources might remain unallocated until they are needed. Dynamic logical partitioning With dynamic logical partitioning (DLPAR), resources can be added, removed, or moved between partitions as computing needs change without restarting the partitions.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-9

Student Notebook

IBM POWER6 LPAR-capable systems IBM Power Systems

• IBM POWER6 processor-based LPAR-capable systems: – IBM Power Systems – Example models: • IBM Power Blade Express servers • IBM Power 520 • IBM Power 550 • IBM Power 560 • IBM Power 570 • IBM Power 575 • IBM Power 595

Visit http://www.ibm.com for latest list of models. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-8. IBM POWER6 LPAR-capable systems

AN113.0

Notes: The visual lists IBM POWER6 processor-based servers that support LPAR.

1-10 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

IBM POWER7 LPAR-capable systems IBM Power Systems

• IBM POWER7 processor-based LPAR-capable systems: – IBM Power Systems – Example models: • IBM Power Blade Express server • IBM Power 710 Express • IBM Power 720 Express • IBM Power 730 Express • IBM Power 740 Express • IBM Power 750 Express • IBM Power 755 • IBM Power 770 • IBM Power 775 Supercomputer • IBM Power 780 • IBM Power 795 Visit http://www.ibm.com for latest list of models. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-9. IBM POWER7 LPAR-capable systems

AN113.0

Notes: The visual lists IBM POWER7 processor-based servers that support LPAR.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-11

Student Notebook

Benefits of using partitions IBM Power Systems

• Capacity management: – Flexibility to allocate resources

• Consolidation: – Consolidate hardware, floor space, software licenses, support contracts, and in-house support and operations – Efficient use of resources

• Application isolation on a single frame: – Separate workloads – Guaranteed resources – Data integrity

• Merge production and test environments: – Test on same hardware The ability to have virtual Ethernet and virtual I/O devices is a benefit to using POWER5, POWER6, and POWER7 processor-based partitions.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-10. Benefits of using partitions

AN113.0

Notes: Sometimes large, symmetric multiprocessing systems are used to run several different applications. This can be an efficient use of resources in some cases. In other cases, separate physical computers are used to run individual applications. This page describes reasons why it might be better to create separate partitions rather than run everything in the same operating system image or use separate physical computers for each application. Capacity management You might want to use partitions to dynamically reallocate resources when the system workload changes. For example, if at the end of each month, one partition runs CPU-intensive batch jobs, you can reconfigure the system monthly to take processors from another lower priority partition and loan them to the partition with the batch application. Consolidation Using partitions gives you the ability to reallocate expensive resources and manage them all with one interface (the HMC). You can reallocate processors, memory, or any I/O adapter (and thus device) by reconfiguring the partitions or by using dynamic partition 1-12 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

operations. All of the resources are located within one server, potentially reducing the amount of floor space needed. Application isolation Partitioning isolates an application from others in different partitions. For example, two applications on one SMP system could interfere with each other or compete for the same resources. One decision support database query could bring a second, interactive application to a frustrating snail’s pace. By separating the applications into their own partitions, they cannot interfere with each other. Also, if one application were to hang or crash the operating system, this would not have an effect on the other partitions. Also, with partitions, one server can support multiple applications that use different time zones or that run on different operating system release levels. Partitions can also be used to comply with application license requirements. For example, a four processor partition could be created to comply with an application license that only allows for a four processor server. Check the vendor’s application license requirements carefully. Merge production and test environments Many customers utilize smaller development systems to develop, test, and migrate applications. These smaller systems might not be the same hardware or have the same software, devices, or infrastructure as the real production system. These issues can be largely avoided by utilizing a partition on the same system as the production applications for development and testing. This also protects the production partition from the activities on the test partition. When the testing is complete, the resources used for the development partition can be reallocated to the production partition. Partitions have an exclusive set of resources The amount of resources allocated to a partition is generally fixed (although there are some exceptions that can be configured). This could be a benefit or a disadvantage. On a symmetric multiprocessor system running multiple applications within the same operating system image, there might be greater sharing of resources than on a partitioned system where the applications are isolated in their own partitions. Virtual Ethernet and virtual I/O devices On POWER6 and POWER7 processor-based servers, you can configure a virtual Ethernet connection that acts like an Ethernet connection but is really a memory-to-memory connection with another partition. Virtual I/O devices allow partitions to use physical devices that are owned by another partition. Also, the Host Ethernet Adapter (or HEA), which is available on all IBM Power Systems (except high-end servers), provides logical Ethernet adapters that communicate directly to LPARs. This reduces the possible overall interaction with the POWER Hypervisor.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-13

Student Notebook

Software licensing IBM Power Systems

• Licensing is per operating system and is based on processing power. – Partial processor and shared processor pool features affect licensing.

• Third-party application provider licenses will vary. Other software

Operating systems

IBM hardware © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-11. Software licensing

AN113.0

Notes: Software licenses on a partitioned system A partition runs its own separate copy of an operating system and programs. Language feature codes, security, user data, most system values, and software release and fixes, also known as program temporary fixes (PTFs), are unique for each partition. For third-party software, you will have to discuss with the vendor how to license packages on a partitioned system. Effect of using sub-processors Because operating systems and many other applications use the number of processors as the basis for licensing, if you use shared processors and take advantage of sub-processor allocations, IBM rounds up to the nearest whole number in calculating the appropriate software licenses, and IBM will not charge you for more software licenses than the number of physical processors on your server. If you plan to run different operating systems on the same server, you need licenses for each individual operating system. The licenses are based on processing power. For 1-14 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

example, on an eight processor system, you might have licenses for seven processors for AIX 6 and one processor for Linux. If you reconfigure your partitions so that, for example, you have 7.2 processors in the partition running AIX 6 and your licenses only allow seven processors, you will receive out-of- compliance messages. Either contact IBM to purchase more licenses or reconfigure the partition to use less processing power to stop these messages. Effect of using the shared processor pool For now, it is sufficient to understand that a software license must be purchased to cover the maximum processing power that your partition might have at any point. POWER6 and POWER7 advanced processing features allow partitions using the shared processor pool to optionally use excess processing power from other partitions. This configuration feature is called uncapped processor allocation. Because a partition that uses uncapped processor allocation could potentially use all of the processors in the shared processing pool, the license for the software in that partition must take this into account. The POWER6 and POWER7 multiple shared processor feature can reduce the number of software licenses by putting a limit on the amount of processors that an uncapped partition can use.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-15

Student Notebook

POWER Hypervisor functions IBM Power Systems

• The POWER Hypervisor is firmware that provides: – Virtual memory management: • Controls page table and I/O access. • Manages real memory addresses versus offset memory addresses.

– Virtual console support – Security and isolation between partitions: • Partitions allowed access only to resources allocated to them (enforced by the POWER Hypervisor).

– Shared processor pool management LPAR 1

LPAR 2

LPAR 3

LPAR 4

POWER Hypervisor System hardware (memory, processors, devices)

Security and isolation barriers

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-12. POWER Hypervisor functions

AN113.0

Notes: Introduction to the POWER Hypervisor Partitions are isolated from each other by firmware (underlying software) called the POWER Hypervisor. The names POWER Hypervisor and hypervisor will be used interchangeably in this course. Virtual memory management by the hypervisor There is no program access permitted between partition memory and I/O memory. Software exceptions and crashes are contained within a partition. The hypervisor controls the page tables used by partitions to ensure a partition has access to only its own physical memory segments. It uses a physical memory offset value for each partition so that the operating system in each partition can continue to use memory address zero as its starting point. Virtual console support The hypervisor provides input/output streams for a virtual console device that can be presented on the HMC. 1-16 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Security and isolation between partitions Besides managing virtual memory, the hypervisor also ensures that a partition accesses only devices allocated to it. It also clears memory, reinitializes processors, resets processor registers, and resets I/O devices when devices are allocated to a partition (statically or dynamically). Shared processor pools Always active on POWER6 and POWER7-based servers, the POWER Hypervisor is responsible for dispatching the LPAR workload across the shared physical processors. The hypervisor creates a shared processor pool from which it allocates virtual processors to the LPARs as needed. Micro-partitioning (or shared processing) allows LPARs to share the processors in shared processor pools. Each LPAR that uses shared processors is assigned a specific amount of processor power from its shared processor pool. On POWER6 and POWER7-based systems there is support for multiple shared processor pools (MSPPs).

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-17

Student Notebook

Hardware Management Console IBM Power Systems

• The Hardware Management Console (HMC) provides: – – – – –

Virtual console windows LPAR configuration and operation management Capacity on demand (CoD) management Service tools Access to LPM function

• PC-based console: – Running custom Linux and Java applications – Remotely accessible – Connects to service processor over private or open network

Desktop

Rack mount © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-13. Hardware Management Console

AN113.0

Notes: HMC description The HMC is a PC-based console that is available in a desktop or a rack-mount model. It runs a customized version of Linux with a Java-based management application. The user can only access the management application, and no additional applications can be installed. A second HMC can be connected to a single managed system for redundancy. Multiple managed systems can be managed by a single HMC. Check the IBM Power Systems Hardware Information Center for the latest information about the HMC hardware and software: http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/powersys/v3r1m5/index.jsp Remote access to the HMC functions Remote access to the HMC Version 7 application is provided by using a web browser from a remote workstation. By default, remote browser access to the HMC is enabled. In addition, there are extensive HMC command-line controls accessible through the use of the Secure Shell (SSH). 1-18 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

HMC: Independent from the managed system and its partitions The managed system refers to the system being managed by the HMC. Although the HMC is necessary for some functions, such as configuring LPARs, it will not affect the operation of any partitions if something goes wrong. The partition configuration information is not only kept on the HMC, but it is also kept in Non-Volatile RAM (NVRAM) on the managed system; therefore, if the HMC were to crash, the partitions would continue to run. In fact, you can remove the HMC, replace it with another, and then download the partition data from the NVRAM on the managed system without affecting the running of the partitions. Service errors focal point If a hardware error occurs, that error can be reported by multiple partitions. To prevent confusion, the HMC is also used as a service focal point for error reporting. An application on the HMC serves as a filter for errors to ensure IBM service calls are placed only once per actual hardware error. Alternatively, a partition configured as the service partition can collect system errors and report them to IBM.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-19

Student Notebook

The big picture IBM Power Systems

Managed system AIX

Unassigned resources

Linux Partition 2

Partition 1

HMC

Non-Volatile RAM

Hypervisor

Service processor

Processors Memory

Ethernet LPAR allocation tables

I/O Slots

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-14. The big picture

AN113.0

Notes: This visual brings together several concepts. • Partitions are independent operating environments, and their resources are managed by the hypervisor. • NVRAM is used on the managed system to hold a copy of the partition configuration so that if the HMC or the network fails, the partitions can continue to run and even reboot if necessary. • Partitions are configured and managed on the HMC, which is a separate Linux PC console. A copy of the partition configuration data is also kept on the HMC (in addition to the primary copy in NVRAM). • The HMC is connected to the managed system through an Ethernet connection to the service processor. The service processor is a separate, independent processor that provides hardware initialization during system load, monitoring of environmental and error events, and maintenance support.

1-20 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Advanced partition features IBM Power Systems

• • • • • • •

Dynamic resource allocation Advanced processor concepts Virtual I/O Integrated Virtual Ethernet Active Memory Sharing Live Partition Mobility Capacity on demand

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-15. Advanced partition features

AN113.0

Notes: This visual lists the advanced partition features covered in the rest of this unit. The dynamic resource allocation, the advanced processor configuration options, the virtual I/O, and the CoD are features available on POWER5, POWER6, and POWER7 processor-based servers. Live Partition Mobility Live Partition Mobility (LPM) is a POWER6 and POWER7-based feature that enables you to migrate running AIX and Linux partitions and their hosted applications from one physical server to another without disrupting the infrastructure services. The migration operation, which takes just a few seconds, maintains complete system transactional integrity. The migration transfers the entire system environment, including processor state, memory, attached virtual devices, and connected users.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-21

Student Notebook

Dynamic partitioning IBM Power Systems

• DLPAR is the ability to add, remove, or move resources between partitions without restarting the partitions. • Resources include: – Processors, memory, and I/O slots. – The ability to add and remove virtual devices.

• Security and isolation between LPARs are not compromised. – A partition sees its own resources plus other available virtual resources. – Resources are reset when moved.

• Applications might or might not be DLPAR-aware. DLPAR allows you to react to changing resource needs. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-16. Dynamic partitioning

AN113.0

Notes: Dynamic partitioning refers to the ability to move resources between partitions without shutting down the partitions. The opposite of dynamic partitioning is static partitioning, where new configurations are only used when a partition is reactivated. DLPAR operations do not weaken the security or isolation between LPARs. A partition sees only resources that have been explicitly allocated to the partition along with any potential connectors for additional virtual resources that might have been configured. Resources are reset when moved from one partition to another. Processors are reinitialized, memory regions are cleared, and adapter slots are reset. DLPAR operations You can add, remove, and move resources among partitions. The resources include memory regions, processing units, and I/O slots. This can be accomplished from the HMC application or by using HMC command-line commands.

1-22 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

With virtual devices, you can add or remove them, but you cannot move them directly from one partition to another. You can, however, dynamically change the configuration that specifies what type of virtual adapter is in a virtual slot. With the Integrated Virtual Ethernet (IVE), you can add or remove logical host Ethernet adapters (LHEAs). You can even move LHEAs from one partition to another dynamically. Applications might not be DLPAR-aware Most applications are unaware of the underlying resource specifics, but some applications and utilities, particularly monitoring tools, might inhibit some DLPAR operations if they bind to processors or pin memory. Many resource-aware applications have been rewritten in recent years to allow DLPAR. Check with your sales representative about your applications.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-23

Student Notebook

How DLPAR works IBM Power Systems

1 HMC

HMC command 2 3

3 Partition B

Partition A

Hypervisor 4 © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-17. How DLPAR works

AN113.0

Notes: The visual illustrates how a dynamic move operation works. • The DLPAR request originates at the HMC. • The request is made over the network to the POWER Hypervisor. • Partition A and Partition B communicate with the HMC about the DLPAR operation through a process running on both partitions. • The POWER Hypervisor makes the resource allocation change. As you can see in the visual, DLPAR operations are dependent on a functioning network between the HMC and the managed system and between the HMC and the partitions. The link between the HMC and the service processor is used to initiate the operation and process the hardware add or remove operation. The link to the partition or partitions from the HMC is used to notify the operating system of the hardware changes, enabling it to take actions as required. If the network is down, either between the HMC and the managed system or between the partitions and the HMC, DLPAR operations cannot occur.

1-24 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Processor concepts IBM Power Systems

Logical

LPAR

LPAR

LPAR

Virtual Shared Dedicated Inactive (CoD)

Deconfigured

Physical (installed) Shared processor pool © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-18. Processor concepts

AN113.0

Notes: This visual summarizes the various concepts concerning POWER5, POWER6, and POWER7 processors. We will see in the next slides that POWER6 and POWER7-based processor systems support other features, such as multiple virtual shared processor pools. Along the bottom are whole, physical processors installed in the computer system. These are configured in various ways into the three partitions. Processing units, partial processors, and logical processors Partitions are allocated in dedicated whole processors or in processing units. A processing unit is the equivalent of 1.0 of a physical processor. A partition can be configured with as little as 0.1 processing units, and after that minimum is satisfied, processing units can be allocated in units of 0.01 processing units. The terms micro-partitioning and partial processors refer to the ability to allocate less than a whole physical processor to a partition.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-25

Student Notebook

Deconfigured A physical processor can be automatically deconfigured from the system because of detected errors or user deconfiguration. Inactive, CoD processors Inactive processors can be added as a dedicated or shared processor through the activation of a CoD license key. CoD is an option that can be purchased. You will learn more about this in a few moments. Shared versus dedicated processors Dedicated processors are physical processors that are allocated to a partition and are dedicated to that partition. Other partitions will not use any time slices on those processors while that partition is active. Shared processors are put into a shared pool. Partitions use processing units from the pools as needed within configuration guidelines. Virtual processors If you were to allocate 2.0 processing units to a partition, the partition might get bits of execution time on up to 20 physical processors. This concept is known as virtual processors. Virtual processors are the representation of the assigned processing units (defined as processors) in the operating system. To run threads, the operating system dispatches threads to the virtual processors. The hypervisor takes the threads and dispatches them to physical processors. The number of virtual processors in the operating system limits the number of physical processors the hypervisor can use for that partition during each clock cycle. The processing units are spread across the virtual processors. Logical processors If simultaneous multithreading is enabled, each virtual processor can be utilized as with two logical processors on POWER5 and POWER6-based systems and up to four logical processors on POWER7-based systems.

1-26 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Micro-partitioning: Shared processor pool IBM Power Systems

• Time sliced sub-processor allocations are dispatched according to demand and entitled capacity. – This example shows one 10 ms time slice, seven running partitions, and four processors. Physical processors

P

P

P

P 10ms

Partition 1 Partition 2 Partition 3 Partition 4 Partition 5 Partition 6 Partition 7

Shared processor pool © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-19. Micro-partitioning: Shared processor pool

AN113.0

Notes: Micro-partitioning is defined as the ability to create a partition and allocate fractional amounts of processing capacity to it. Processing power can be allocated to partitions using dedicated processors or shared processors. For shared processor partitions, processing power can be allocated in the granularity of 0.01 processing units. A partition must have a minimum of 0.1 processing units. The visual shows seven partitions being run on a processing pool of four physical processors. The diagram represents a single 10 millisecond (ms) interval. Each partition gets a percentage of the execution dispatch time on the processors in the pool, based on its capacity assignment.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-27

Student Notebook

Multiple shared processor pools IBM Power Systems

Up to 64 shared processor pools

Shared processor pooln Shared processor pool1

Set of micro-partitions

Set of micro-partitions

Shared processor pool0 Set of micro-partitions

LPAR LPAR3

LPAR1 LPAR2 LPAR5 LPAR6

LPAR LPAR4

Shared Dedicated

Physical processors Physical shared processor pool © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-20. Multiple shared processor pools

AN113.0

Notes: By default, all physical processors that are not dedicated to specific LPARs are grouped together in a shared processor pool. You can assign a specific amount of the processing capacity in this shared processor pool to each LPAR that uses shared processors. With POWER6 and POWER7, you can define MSPPs and assign the shared partitions to any of these MSPPs. The system administrator can assign a set of micro-partitions to a specific shared processor pool to control the processor capacity consumed from the physical processor pool. Reserved and maximum processing unit values The administrator can activate a shared processor pool by setting a maximum processing unit value and, optionally, a reserved processing unit value for that pool. The maximum processing unit value limits the total number of processing units that can be used by the set of LPARs in the shared processor pool. The reserved processing unit value is the number of processing units that are reserved for the use of uncapped LPARs within the shared processor pool.

1-28 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Virtual I/O IBM Power Systems

• Each partition has virtual I/O slots. – Configurable for each partition.

• Virtual slots can have a virtual adapter instance. – Ethernet, SCSI, or Fibre Channel.

• Virtual I/O slots can be dynamically added or removed just like physical I/O slots. – Cannot be dynamically moved to another partition.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-21. Virtual I/O

AN113.0

Notes: Virtual I/O basics Each partition, by default, is configured to support 10 virtual I/O slots, and each slot can be populated with a virtual adapter instance, which allows partitions to share devices. It also provides virtual Ethernet connections between partitions on the same system. More virtual slots can be configured. Virtual adapters interact with the operating system like any other adapter card except they are not physically present. Virtual adapters are recorded in system inventory and management utilities. As with physical I/O adapters, a virtual I/O adapter must first be deconfigured from the operating system to perform a DLPAR remove operation.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-29

Student Notebook

Virtual Ethernet Virtual Ethernet provides the same function as using an Ethernet adapter and is implemented through high-speed, inter-partition, in-memory communication. There are two options with virtual Ethernet: • A virtual Ethernet connection can be configured between two LPARs on the same managed system. There is no actual physical adapter. This provides a fast network connection between the partitions. • A virtual Ethernet connection can be configured on one partition to connect to a network using a shared Ethernet adapter (SEA) of another partition (called a hosting partition or a Virtual I/O Server) on that managed system. Virtual SCSI The virtual SCSI (VSCSI) option provides access to block storage devices in other partitions (that is, device sharing). It uses the client/server model where the server exports disks, logical volumes, files, or other SCSI-based devices, and the client sees the imported device as a standard SCSI device. Virtual Fibre Channel A virtual Fibre Channel adapter is a virtual adapter that provides client LPARs with a Fibre Channel connection to a storage area network through the Virtual I/O Server LPAR. The Virtual I/O Server partition provides the connection between the virtual Fibre Channel server adapters and the physical Fibre Channel adapters assigned to the Virtual I/O Server partition on the managed system.

1-30 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Virtual I/O example IBM Power Systems

Client partition

Virtual I/O server partition

Virtual switch

Virtual Ethernet Virtual Ethernet

Client adapter DMA buffer

Virtual Ethernet

Virtual Disk Logical disk

Hypervisor

SCSI RDMA protocol Device DM A

Physical Ethernet

Layer 2 bridge

Physical network

Server adapter

Device mapping

transfer

Different types of backing storage © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-22. Virtual I/O example

AN113.0

Notes: Client/server relationship Virtual I/O devices provide for sharing of physical resources, such as adapters and SCSI devices, among partitions. Multiple partitions can share physical I/O resources, and each partition can simultaneously use virtual and physical (natively attached) I/O devices. When sharing SCSI devices, the client/server model is used to designate partitions as users or suppliers of resources. A server makes a VSCSI server adapter available for use by a client partition. A client configures a VSCSI client adapter that uses the resources provided by a VSCSI server adapter. If a server partition providing I/O for a client partition fails, the client partition might continue to function, depending on the significance of the hardware it is using. For example, if the server is providing the paging volume for another partition, a failure of the server partition will be significant to the client.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-31

Student Notebook

Virtual I/O Server The IBM Virtual I/O Server software allows the creation of partitions that use the I/O resources of another partition. In this way, it helps maximize the utilization of physical resources on POWER5, POWER6, and POWER7 systems. Partitions can have dedicated I/O, virtual I/O, or both. Physical resources are assigned to the Virtual I/O Server partition in the same way physical resources are assigned to other partitions. Virtual I/O Server is a separate software product, and it is included as part of the PowerVM Express, Standard, and Enterprise edition system features. See the Virtual I/O Server support website for specific devices that are supported: https://www.ibm.com/support/entry/myportal/Overview/Software/Virtualization_software/ PowerVM_Virtual_I~O_Server VSCSI adapters VSCSI adapters provide the ability for a partition to use SCSI devices that are owned by another partition. For example, one partition can provide disk storage space to other partitions. Virtual Ethernet There are two main features to virtual Ethernet. One is the inter-partition virtual switch to provide support for connecting up to 4,096 local area networks (LANs). LAN IDs are used to configure virtual Ethernet LANs. All partitions using a particular LAN ID can communicate with each other. The other feature is a function called SEA, which bridges networks together without using TCP/IP routing. This function allows the partition to appear to be connected directly to an external network. The main benefit of using this feature is that each partition need not have its own physical network adapter. Virtual Fibre Channel adapters With N_Port ID virtualization (NPIV) you can configure the managed system so that multiple LPARs can access independent physical storage through the same physical Fibre Channel adapter. To access physical storage in a typical storage area network (SAN) that uses Fibre Channel, the physical storage is mapped to logical units (LUNs), and the LUNs are mapped to the ports of physical Fibre Channel adapters. Each physical port on each physical Fibre Channel adapter is identified using one worldwide port name (WWPN). NPIV is a standard technology for Fibre Channel networks that enables you to connect multiple LPARs to one physical port of a physical Fibre Channel adapter. Each LPAR is identified by a unique WWPN, which means you can connect each LPAR to independent physical storage on an SAN.

1-32 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Integrated Virtual Ethernet IBM Power Systems

• Also referred to as host Ethernet adapter. – Available on most POWER6 and POWER7 servers (except high-end).

• Provides network connectivity for LPARs without a virtual I/O server: – Integrated high-speed Ethernet ports with hardware-assisted virtualization capabilities. – Offers virtualization support for Ethernet connections. – Integrated directly into the GX+ bus on a managed system. – An LHEA must be created on the logical partition.

• Three types available: – Dual-port 1 Gigabit – Quad-port 1 Gigabit – Dual-port 10 Gigabit © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-23. Integrated Virtual Ethernet

AN113.0

Notes: Host Ethernet adapter A host Ethernet adapter (HEA) is a physical Ethernet adapter that is integrated directly into the GX+ bus on a managed system. HEAs offer high throughput, low latency, and virtualization support for Ethernet connections. HEAs are also known as IVE adapters. Unlike most other types of I/O devices, you can never assign the HEA itself to an LPAR. Instead, multiple LPARs can connect directly to the HEA and use the HEA resources. This allows these LPARs to access external networks through the HEA without having to go through an Ethernet bridge on another LPAR.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-33

Student Notebook

IVE example IBM Power Systems

AIX LPAR

ent

ent

Linux LPAR

eth

Layer 2 switch

Layer 2 switch

Physical port

Physical port

Physical network

Physical network

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-24. IVE example

AN113.0

Notes: In this logical diagram, the AIX and Linux LPARs communicate directly to the HEA, reducing the interaction with the POWER Hypervisor. IVE provides a way for an LPAR to communicate with other LPARs or with external networks without going through a Virtual I/O Server. After you create an LHEA for an LPAR, a network device is created in the LPAR. This network device is named entX on AIX LPARs and ethX on Linux LPARs, where X represents sequentially assigned numbers. The user can then set up a TCP/IP configuration similar to a physical Ethernet device to communicate with other LPARs or the external network.

1-34 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Active Memory Sharing IBM Power Systems

• Active Memory Sharing (AMS) allows multiple LPARs to share a common pool of physical memory. – AMS intelligently assigns memory from one partition to another based on memory page demands. • Optimizes memory utilization and provides flexible memory usage.

LPAR1

LPAR2

LPAR3

POWER Hypervisor

Virtual I/O Server

AMS shared memory pool

Paging devices

Physical memory © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-25. Active Memory Sharing

AN113.0

Notes: The Active Memory Sharing (AMS) feature of PowerVM allows sharing of system memory. In addition to traditional dedicated memory assignments to single LPARs, the administrator has the choice of creating a memory pool that can be shared among a set of LPARs. Each LPAR in the system can be configured to have either dedicated or shared memory. AMS intelligently shares memory by dynamically moving it from one partition to another on demand. This optimizes memory utilization and allows for flexible global memory usage. Because memory utilization can be linked to processor utilization, this function complements shared processors very well. Systems with low CPU requirements are likely to have low memory residency requirements. The Virtual I/O Server is required as paging partition, owning the paging devices used when the hypervisor pages out one partition’s memory to satisfy demands from other partitions.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-35

Student Notebook

Live Partition Mobility IBM Power Systems

• Live Partition Mobility provides the ability to move an AIX or Linux partition from one physical server to another compatible server. • Useful for: – Reducing the impact of planned outages and increasing application availability. – Workload balancing and consolidation. – Relocation of workload to enable workload. – Provision of new technology with no disruption to service (migration to newer systems).

• Requirements: – POWER6 or POWER7 systems. – LPAR must only have virtual adapters.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-26. Live Partition Mobility

AN113.0

Notes: For systems managed by an HMC, you can migrate a powered off or powered on AIX or Linux LPAR to a different system that is managed by the same or by a different HMC. For systems managed by the Integrated Virtualization Manager (IVM), you can migrate a powered off or powered on partition to a different system that is managed by a different IVM. LPM is included in the PowerVM Enterprise Edition. It enables the ability to perform active and inactive Live Partition Mobility operations. You can check whether these capabilities have been enabled from the server properties or from the HMC command line. Active Partition Mobility refers to moving a running LPAR, including its operating system and applications, from one system to another. The LPAR and the applications running on the LPAR do not need to be shut down. Inactive Partition Mobility refers to moving a powered off LPAR from one system to another.

1-36 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Capacity on demand IBM Power Systems

• Capacity upgrade on demand (CUoD) – Permanent activation of processors or memory.

• Trial CoD – No charge 30-day activation of processors or memory resources.

• On/off CoD – Ability to activate processor or memory resources temporarily.

• Utility CoD – Additional processor capacity on a temporary basis within the shared processor pool.

• Capacity BackUp

Add reserve resources

– Processors and memory temporarily added to backup server.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-27. Capacity on demand

AN113.0

Notes: Introduction to capacity on demand Capacity on demand (CoD) is the name given to a collection of optional features available for purchase on certain models of POWER5+, POWER6, and POWER7 processor-based servers. The main bullets in the visual list purchasing options. These options are managed from the HMC and require a license key to activate. Capacity upgrade on demand (CUoD) requires a purchase agreement. When processors or memory are added, there is no ability to turn off the capacity. Processors are added in units of one whole processor, and memory can be added in 1 GB increments. Trial CoD is available for up to 30 contiguous days at no additional cost to allow testing and emergency relief while the customer processes the purchase of permanent CUoD resources. On/Off CoD provides temporary additional processor or memory resources. Activity is reported to IBM monthly, and there must be an On/Off Capacity agreement.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-37

Student Notebook

Utility CoD allows clients to use additional capacity in a minute-by-minute basis, and the service delivers a processor minute of capacity when and where you need it. Just like electricity is accounted for as it is used, processor minutes are accounted for at the time of actual use. Utility CoD allows you to assign inactive processors that are installed on the system to the shared processor pool where they can be used to satisfy the variable workload demands of the business. The assigned processors will be treated as utility processors that are available for use by uncapped partitions. When an uncapped partition reaches 100% utilization and at least 10% of a utility processor is put into use during a one minute interval, a utility processor minute will be considered consumed. Capacity BackUp adds reserve processor and memory capacity to a backup server in the event of an unforeseen loss of production server capability due to forces beyond your control. For more information, visit the Power Systems Capacity on Demand website at http://www.ibm.com/systems/power/hardware/cod/index.html.

1-38 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

PowerVM editions IBM Power Systems

Power VM Editions

Express

Standard

Enterprise

Maximum VMs

3 / Server

1000 / Server

1000 / Server

VMControl, IVM, SDMC

VMControl, IVM*, HMC, SDMC

VMControl, IVM*, HMC, SDMC

(dual)

(dual)

Management Virtual I/O server Suspend/Resume NPIV Shared processor pools Shared storage pools Thin provisioning Active Memory Sharing Live Partition Mobility

* IVM only supports a single virtual I/O server.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-28. PowerVM editions

AN113.0

Notes: PowerVM Express Edition is designed for users looking for an introduction to more advanced virtualization features at a highly affordable price. With PowerVM Express Edition, users can create up to three partitions on the server, leverage virtualized disk and optical devices VIOS and even try out the Shared Processor Pool. For users ready to get the full value out of their server, IBM offers PowerVM Standard Edition providing the most complete virtualization functionality for AIX, IBM i and Linux operating systems in the industry. PowerVM Standard Edition is supported on Power Systems servers and includes features designed to allow businesses to increase system utilization; while helping to ensure applications continue to get the resources they need. PowerVM Enterprise Edition includes all the features of PowerVM Standard Edition plus two new industry-leading capabilities called Active Memory Sharing and Live Partition Mobility. Active Memory Sharing intelligently flows system memory from one partition to another as workload demands change. Live Partition Mobility allows for the movement of a running partition from one server to another with no application downtime, resulting in better system utilization, improved application availability and energy savings. With Live © Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-39

Student Notebook

Partition Mobility, planned application downtime due to regular server maintenance can be a thing of the past. For more informations about PowerVM editions, refer to: http://www.ibm.com/systems/power/software/virtualization/editions/index.html.

1-40 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Partitioning concepts: Summary IBM Power Systems

Part#1

Part#2

Part#3

Part#4

Part#5

Part#6

Use thisAIX layout for all your Virtual V7 IBMdrawing i AIX V6needs AIX V7 Linux I/O Server

PPPPPP PPPPPP MMMMM AAAAAA

AIX Kernel

Part#7-11 LAN AIXV7/Linux

PPPP PPP

PPPPPP

MMMM AAAAA

P MMM AAA

MMM AAAA

M AA

MM AAA

AIX Kernel

Linux Kernel

IBM i Kernel

AIX Kernel

AIX Kernel

M M M M M A A Virtual LAN Virtual I/O O O O O O O O O O S S S S SS SS S

Virtual Ethernet

POWER Hypervisor

HMC © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-29. Partitioning concepts: Summary

AN113.0

Notes: This visual illustrates a system with 11 partitions running different operating systems. It shows the basic components of a system running LPARs, such as the HMC, the POWER Hypervisor, a virtual LAN, virtual I/O, and both dedicated and shared processor partitions. In the visual, the P= stands for processors, M= for memory, and A= for adapters in I/O slots. Details shown in the example in the visual: • • • • •

Partitions 1-3 are using dedicated processors. Partitions 4-11 are using the shared processor pool. Partitions 4-11 are micro-partitions using less than a whole processor. Partitions 1 and 6-11 have virtual Ethernet connections. Partitions 7-11 are making use of virtual Ethernet and virtual I/O to share Ethernet adapters and disks. • Partition 1 is a Virtual I/O Server and has the physical disks and Ethernet adapters that the virtual clients are using.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-41

Student Notebook

Integrated Virtualization Manager IBM Power Systems

• Provides support for LPARs without a physical HMC: – Manages a single server • IVM software runs in the virtual I/O server partition.

– Provides a subset of HMC functionality • Hypervisor has been modified to enable VIOS to manage the partitioned system without an HMC.

– Implicit rule of configuration and setup • First operating system installed must be the VIOS.

VIOS IVM

AIX V7.1

AIX V6.1

Linux

– Virtual I/O server partition owns all physical I/O • Client partitions can access virtual optical, virtual disk, virtual Ethernet, IVE, and console.

Virtual LAN POWER Hypervisor

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-30. Integrated Virtualization Manager

AN113.0

Notes: IVM description IVM provides partition support without a physical HMC. The benefit is for low-end systems to save the cost and space of a physical HMC. The HMC functionality is provided by the IVM software running in the Virtual I/O Server partition. The IVM can be accessed through a web browser or an HMC compatible command-line interface. The client partition I/O was formerly virtualized, but with POWER6 and POWER7-based processor systems, you can assign dedicated I/O to LPARs. Only one Virtual I/O Server partition can be installed on a system using IVM. The maximum number of partitions is 10 times the number of processors. DLPAR for the Virtual I/O Server partition is supported using the IVM interface.

1-42 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

LPAR configuration process IBM Power Systems

1 Create Createplan planfor forusage usagemodel modeland andapplications. applications 2 Plan Planresources resourcesfor forpartitions. partitions 3

SetCreate up HMC managed system. andand configure partitions

4 Create Createand andconfigure configurepartitions. partitions 5 Activate Activatepartitions partitionsand andinstall installoperating operationsystems. systems 6 Configure Configureand andtest testservice serviceapplications. applications © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-31. LPAR configuration process

AN113.0

Notes: These are the overall steps for configuring partitions on a managed system. This course is designed to follow this process from step two to the end. Step one: Plan for usage model and applications If you have already purchased a system, you have probably already completed step one as part of the system sizing process. As part of this step, you should have some idea about how to divide the applications into partitions. You should also plan for future needs, such as partitions for development and testing. Step two: Plan resources for partitions Planning the resource allocations for partitions is the most important step in the configuration process because it will hopefully eliminate errors and multiple reconfigurations later in the process. Planning is crucial because, as you will see, with multiple partitions, the configuration information becomes quite complex very quickly. This is particularly true for the network © Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-43

Student Notebook

configuration of your partitions and the HMC. You should plan for the normal operation of the application in a partition and for best case and worst case scenarios (that is, extra resources and hardware failure). It is important to document all configurations and keep the records up to date. One useful tool to use during this step (and step one if the sales representative uses it) is the System Planning Tool (SPT) available from IBM. You can use this tool to plan the resources for the partitions on the system, and then import the partition configurations from your plan. The use of this tool is covered in this course. Step three: Power on and set up managed system The managed system is a term used to describe a single system with one or more partitions. For new managed systems, the HMC can be configured to support the managed system. The HMC should be set up first, especially the network connection for DHCP services, before the managed system has power applied to it (plugged in) so that the managed system's service processor connection to the HMC is automatically set; then, when you power on the managed system from the HMC, choose the Partition Standby power on option. This option will allow you to configure partitions. Step four: Create and configure partitions You must plan, create, and configure each LPAR. Configuring a partition consists of allocating resources and setting other configuration options. Step five: Activate partitions and install operating systems At this point you can activate each partition and install an operating system. Step six: Configure and test service applications Because IBM cannot predict how a particular system might be divided into separate operating system environments, you might need to alter the configuration of the service applications, such as Service Agent and Service Focal Point.

1-44 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

LPAR references IBM Power Systems

• Documentation: – http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/eserver/ (IBM Systems Information Centers) – http://www.ibm.com/support/publications/us/library/

• LPAR and PowerVM information – http://www.ibm.com/systems/power/software/virtualization/index.html

• IBM Redbooks – http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/

• Technical support Web sites: – http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/support/unixservers/ – http://www.software.ibm.com/webapp/set2/sas/f/vios/home.html – http://www.software.ibm.com/webapp/set2/sas/f/power5cm/power7.html

• Linux Web site – http://www.ibm.com/systems/p/linux/

Web links might change over time. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-32. LPAR references

AN113.0

Notes: This list is a starting point to obtain documentation for your system. There is documentation for your specific system model, for the HMC, for the operating systems, and for configuring partitions. The library link shown first in the visual is a good starting point for information. Links are provided there for the Information Centers. There are new IBM Redbooks released frequently, particularly as a product matures. Check the www.redbooks.ibm.com website from time to time. The web locations shown in the visual might change over time; however, generally old links are redirected to new ones. Linux adapter support For customers installing Linux on Power Systems, refer to the following website for information on supported I/O adapters and storage devices: http://www.ibm.com/systems/p/hardware/reports/factsfeatures.html

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-45

Student Notebook

AN11 course content IBM Power Systems

• System p hardware overview • HMC • System Planning Tool • HMC maintenance • System power management • Configuring LPARs • Dynamic resource allocation

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-33. AN11 course content

AN113.0

Notes: The purpose of this visual is to provide an overview of the content and the different features that will be covered in this class. Some of the advanced features provided in the overview just completed in this introduction unit are not covered in that class.

1-46 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Checkpoint (1 of 3) IBM Power Systems

1. True or False: A partition is an independent operating environment. 2. What is it that makes logical partitioning different from physical partitioning? a. Resource assignments are flexible. b. Resources can be moved between partitions without a restart. c. Partitioning is not dependent on physical system building blocks.

3. Which of the following are true for dynamic partition operations? a. All AIX partitions on POWER6 and POWER7 processor-based systems are capable of dynamic resource allocations. b. Virtual I/O devices can be dynamically added or removed but not moved between partitions. c. Partitions do not need to be restarted to add, remove, or move resources. d. All of the above. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-34. Checkpoint (1 of 3)

AN113.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-47

Student Notebook

Checkpoint (2 of 3) IBM Power Systems

4. List the types of resources that are configured in partitions. 5. What system option provides the ability to order additional resources that can be activated when you need them? 6. Which of the following are benefits of using partitions? a. Better management of resources across operating environments b. Isolate applications that were all running on one system c. Better high availability solution d. Manage operational costs by consolidating resources

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-35. Checkpoint (2 of 3)

AN113.0

Notes:

1-48 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Checkpoint (3 of 3) IBM Power Systems

7. What is the system component that performs the resource allocation to partitions? 8. What is the system component needed to configure partitions, configure CoD, and provide access to virtual consoles? 9. What is the term used for the concept of allocating subprocessors to partitions?

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-36. Checkpoint (3 of 3)

AN113.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-49

Student Notebook

Exercise: Introduction to partitioning IBM Power Systems

Unit exerc is

e

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-37. Exercise: Introduction to partitioning

AN113.0

Notes:

1-50 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Unit summary IBM Power Systems

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: • Describe the following terms: – Partition, logical partition (LPAR), resource

• Describe the following partition concepts: – Dynamic logical partitioning – Micro-partitioning – Shared processor pool – Virtual I/O – Live Partition Mobility (LPM) – Capacity on demand (CoD)

• Describe the functions of the Hardware Management Console (HMC) • Describe the functions performed by the POWER Hypervisor • Describe the overall process for configuring partitions • List references for IBM POWER6 and POWER7 processor-based system partitioning © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-38. Unit summary

AN113.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

1-51

Student Notebook

1-52 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Unit 2. Hardware system overview What this unit is about This unit describes the system components and location code formats for the LPAR-capable IBM POWER7 processor-based systems.

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Identify basic architecture elements and hardware components of POWER7 processor-based systems • Discuss the different POWER7 server options: Express versus Enterprise • Describe the functions of the service processor • Describe physical location code conventions • Use AIX commands to view location codes

How you will check your progress Accountability: • Checkpoint questions • Machine exercises

References http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/eserver/  IBM System p and AIX Information Center Redpapers: IBM BladeCenter Technical Overview and Introduction IBM POWER 710 and 730 Technical Overview and Introduction IBM POWER 720 and 740 Technical Overview and Introduction IBM POWER 750 and 755 Technical Overview and Introduction IBM POWER 770 and 780 Technical Overview and Introduction IBM POWER 795 Technical Overview and Introduction http://www.ibm.com/systems/power/hardware/775/  IBM Power 775 Supercomputer

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 2. Hardware system overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-1

Student Notebook

Unit objectives IBM Power Systems

After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Identify basic architecture elements and hardware components of IBM POWER7 processor-based systems • Discuss the different POWER7 server options: Express versus Enterprise • Describe the functions of the service processor • Describe physical location code conventions • Use AIX commands to view location codes

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-1. Unit objectives

AN113.0

Notes:

2-2

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

IBM POWER6 processor-based systems IBM Power Systems

• IBM System p and IBM System i unification: – Same hardware platform: • Single product set • Servers, adapters and I/O components

– Support AIX V5.3, AIX V6.1, IBM i 5.4, IBM i 6.1, and Linux (RHEL4, RHEL5, SLES 9, and SLES10) – All support PowerVM editions

• Entry systems: One- to eight-way processor systems – Examples: Power 520, Power 550, BladeCenter JS12, BladeCenter JS22

• Mid-range systems: Two- to 16-way processor systems – Example: Power 570

• High end systems: Eight- to 64-way processor systems – Examples: Power 575, Power 595

g Scalin 64-way o t e n O s system © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-2. IBM POWER6 processor-based systems

AN113.0

Notes: IBM Power Systems: A single, energy efficient and easy-to-deploy platform for all of your UNIX, Linux, and IBM i applications. Again with POWER6 we are breaking down barriers and pushing the envelope of where the technology can go. POWER6 processors most visible feature is the speed with ultra-high frequencies - breaking the 5 GHz barrier. Power Systems are shipped with 3.5 GHz, 4.2 GHz, 4.7 GHz, and 5.0 GHz dual-core chips. One of the keys to our performance has always been balanced system design -- and with POWER 6 we have doubled the memory bandwidth and 3X the SMP and I/O bandwidth. But POWER6 is not just about performance. Substantial focus has been put on reliability and availability as well. System z key reliability features have been brought to System p such as the Processor Instruction Retry or the Storage keys. No more System i or System p, only Power Systems where you can select to run AIX, Linux, or IBM i. All system models support all three operating systems.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 2. Hardware system overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-3

Student Notebook

All Power Systems servers can utilize logical partitioning (LPAR) technology implemented through System p virtualization technologies, the operating system (OS), and a Hardware Management Console (HMC), IBM Systems Director Management Console (SDMC), or Integrated Virtualization Manager (IVM). Dynamic LPAR allows clients to dynamically allocate many system resources to application partitions without rebooting. PowerVM Editions In addition to the base virtualization that is standard on every System p server, three optional virtualization features are available on the server: PowerVM Express Edition, PowerVM Standard Edition (formerly Advanced POWER Virtualization (APV) Standard), and PowerVM Enterprise Edition (formerly APV Enterprise). POWER6 integrated hardware accelerators Introduced with the POWER6 processor design is hardware decimal floating-point support improving the performance of the basic mathematical calculations of financial transactions that occur regularly on today’s business computers. This will improve the performance of decimal calculations used by financial and retail companies up to seven times what’s done in software today. The POWER6 processor also includes an AltiVec SIMD accelerator, which helps to improve the performance of multi-media and 3D modeling algorithms used primarily in High performance computing. POWER6 EnergyScale Technology The IBM POWER6 architecture with EnergyScale technology provides features such as power trending, power-saving, capping of maximum power, and thermal measurement. These features are enabled using IBM Systems Director Active Energy Manager software within the IBM Director console. They measure energy use and direct policies toward the energy-efficient operation of the server, while the underlying hardware automatically adjusts to deliver the desired operating solution. The POWER6 chip is also designed to conserve power and reduce heat generated by the server. A feature called nap mode enables processor clocks to be dynamically turned off when there is no useful work to be done and turned back on when there are instructions to be executed. Other features Other features introduced with POWER6 processor-based technology include an Integrated Virtual Ethernet adapter standard on most systems. The Processor Instruction Retry feature automatically monitoring the POWER6 processor and, if needed, restarting the processor workload without disruption to the application.

2-4

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

POWER6 processor characteristics • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Ultra-high frequency dual-core chip: Up to 5.0 GHz Seven-way superscalar, two-way SMT core Up to five instr. for one thread; up to two for other Nine execution units 2LS, 2FP, 2FX, 1VMX, 1DP 790M transistors, 341 mm2 die Up to 64-core SMP systems 2x4 MB on-chip L2 – point of coherency On-chip L3 directory and controller Two memory controllers on-chip CMOS 65nm lithography, SOI Cu High-speed elastic bus interface at 2:1 freq Full error checking and recovery Dynamic power saving Advanced Clock gating

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 2. Hardware system overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-5

Student Notebook

POWER7 system highlights IBM Power Systems

• Balance system design – Cache, memory, and I/O

• POWER7 processor technology: – Sixth implementation of multi-core design – On chip L2 and L3 caches

• POWER7 System architecture: – Blades to high end offerings – Enhances memory implementation – PCIe, SAS, and SATA

• Built in virtualization: – Memory expansion – VMControl

• Green technologies: – Processor nap and sleep mode – Memory power down support – Aggressive power save and capping modes 700

• Availability:

600

– Processor instruction retry – Alternate process recovery – Concurrent add and services

500

400

300

200

100

0

JS23

JS43

520

550

750

560

570/16 570/32

770

780

595

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-3. POWER7 system highlights

AN113.0

Notes: This is an overview of the products and features for which details will be provided in subsequent slides.

2-6

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

POWER7 processor chip IBM Power Systems

Local SMP Links POWER7 CORE L2 Cache

F A S T

POWER7 CORE

POWER7 CORE

POWER7 CORE

L2 Cache

L2 Cache

L2 Cache

L3 REGION MC0

MC1

L3 Cache and Chip Interconnect L2 Cache

L2 Cache

L2 Cache

L2 Cache

POWER7 CORE

POWER7 CORE

POWER7 CORE

POWER7 CORE

Remote SMP & I/O Links

Binary compatibility with POWER6

• Cores: Eight (four / six core options) • 567mm2 technology: – 45 nm lithography, Cu, SOI, eDRAM • Transistors: 1.2 B: – Equivalent function of 2.7B – eDRAM efficiency • Eight processor cores: – Twelve execution units per core – Four-way SMT per core – up to four threads per core – 32 threads per chip – L1: 32 KB I cache / 32 KB D cache – L2: 256 KB per core – L3: Shared 32 MB on chip eDRAM • Dual DDR3 memory controllers – 90 GB/s memory bandwidth per chip • Scalability up to 32 sockets: – 360 GB/s SMP bandwidth/chip – 20,000 coherent operations in flight

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-4. POWER7 processor chip

AN113.0

Notes: This visual depicts the POWER7 processor chip (that is, the processor module). In this generation of the POWER7 processor module, a breakthrough in material engineering and microprocessor fabrication has enabled IBM to implement the L3 cache in eDRAM and place it on the POWER7 processor die. The L3 cache is critical to a balanced design, as is the ability to provide good signaling between the L3 cache and other elements of the hierarchy such as the L2 cache or SMP interconnect. The on-chip L3 cache is organized into separate areas with differing latency characteristics. The processor chip could contain up to eight processor cores. Each processor core is associated with a Fast Local Region of L3 cache (FLR-L3) but also has access to other L3 cache regions as shared L3 cache. Additionally, each core can negotiate to use the FLR-L3 cache associated with another core, depending on reference patterns. Data can also be cloned to be stored in more than one core's FLR-L3 cache, again depending on reference

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 2. Hardware system overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-7

Student Notebook

patterns. This intelligent cache management enables the POWER7 processor to optimize the access to L3 cache lines and minimize overall cache latencies. This eDRAM (Embedded DRAMS) permits much wider buses and higher operation speeds, and due to the higher density of DRAM in comparison to SRAM, larger amounts of memory can potentially be used. Please note that throughout this unit, the terms POWER7 processor module and the POWER7 processor chip are used interchangeably.

2-8

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

POWER7 modes: General IBM Power Systems

POWER6 (and POWER6+)

POWER7

Customer value

Two-thread SMT

Four-thread SMT

Throughput performance, processor core utilization

VMX-Vector Multimedia Extension or AltiVec

VSX (Vector Scalar Extension)

High performance computing

Barrier synchronization Fixed 128-byte array; Kernel extension access

Enhanced barrier synchronization Variable sized array; User shared memory access

High performance computing parallel programming synchronization facility

64-core and 128-thread scaling

32-core and 128-thread scaling 64-core and 256-thread scaling 256-core and 1024-thread scaling

Performance and scalability for large scale-up single system image workloads (such as OLTP, ERP scale-up, WPAR consolidation)

EnergyScale CPU idle

EnergyScale CPU idle and folding with NAP and SLEEP

Improved energy efficiency

Affinity OFF by default

Three-tier memory, micropartition affinity

Improved system performance for system images spanning sockets and nodes

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-5. POWER7 modes: General

AN113.0

Notes: The table in the visual identifies the features available with each compatibility mode as well as the customer benefit. Intelligent threads The POWER7 processor features intelligent threads that can vary based on the workload demand. The system either automatically selects (or the system administrator can manually select) whether a workload benefits from dedicating as much capability as possible to a single thread of work, or if the workload benefits more from having capability spread across two or four threads of work. With more threads, the POWER7 processor can deliver more total capacity as more tasks are accomplished in parallel. With fewer threads, those workloads that need very fast individual tasks can get the performance they need for maximum benefit. There will be later discussions of 4-thread SMT and the energy management enhancements. There is a significant change to the architecture for vector based computing; the VMX unit has been replaced with the VSX unit.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 2. Hardware system overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-9

Student Notebook

What is VMX? The VMX technology provides a model that accelerates the performance of various software applications based primarily on vector and matrix operations. The vector processing technology is a short vector parallel architecture that extends the instruction set architecture (ISA) of the PowerPC. VMX is based on separate vector/SIMD-style execution units, which have high data parallelism. The vector processing technology operations can perform on multiple data elements in a single instruction. VMX technology supports the following audio and visual applications: • • • • • • • • •

Voice over IP Speech recognition Voice/sound processing Communications 2D and 3D graphics Image and video processing Array number processing Cellular base station processing High bandwidth data communication

Some VSX highlights: • • • •

Two VSX units that can each handle two double precision FP instructions Eight FLOPS per cycles VSX units can also handle four single precision instructions per cycle VSX instruction set support for vector and scalar instructions

What is SIMD? It describes computers with multiple processing elements that perform the same operation on multiple data simultaneously. Thus, such machines exploit data level parallelism. An application that might take advantage of SIMD is one where the same value is being added (or subtracted) to a large number of data points, a common operation in many multimedia applications. One example would be changing the brightness of an image. Each pixel of an image consists of three values for the brightness of the red, green and blue portions of the color. To change the brightness, the R, G and B values are read from memory, a value is added (or subtracted) from them, and the resulting values are written back out to memory. With a SIMD processor, there are two improvements to this process. For one, the data is understood to be in blocks, and a number of values can be loaded all at once. Instead of a series of instructions saying “get this pixel, now get the next pixel”, a SIMD processor will have a single instruction that effectively says “get lots of pixels” (lots is a number that varies from design to design). For a variety of reasons, this can take much less time than getting each pixel individually, like with traditional CPU design. POWER5+ uses out-of-order execution; POWER6 however uses mostly in-order execution. POWER7 uses out of order execution. This allows the processor to avoid a stall that occur when the data needed to perform an operation is unavailable. 2-10 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

POWER7 modes for AIX IBM Power Systems

Max cores AIX

and threads supported

Release/TL

POWER6

POWER7

AIX 5.3 (all TLs supported)

64 / 128

N/A

AIX 6.1 TL2, TL3

64 / 128

N/A

AIX 6.1 TL4

64 / 128

64 / 256

AIX 6.1 TL5

64 / 128

64 / 256

AIX 7.1

64 / 128

256 / 1024

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-6. POWER7 modes for AIX

AN113.0

Notes: The table in this visual identifies the maximum number of cores and hardware threads per system.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 2. Hardware system overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-11

Student Notebook

POWER7 TurboCore mode IBM Power Systems

• TurboCore chips: Four available cores. • Aggregation of L3 caches of unused cores. • TurboCore chips have 2X the L3 cache per chip available. – Four TurboCore chips L3 = 32 MB

• Chips run at higher frequency. – Power reduction of unused cores.

• With reboot, the system can be reconfigured to eight core mode.

TurboCore POWER7 chip P O W E R

Core

Core

Core

Core

L2

L2

L2

L2

32 MB L3 Cache

G X B U S

L2

L2

L2

L2

Core

Core

Core

Core

S M P F A B R I C

– ASM menus Memory Interface

TurboCores

Unused core

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-7. POWER7 TurboCore mode

AN113.0

Notes: The Power 780 and Power 795 systems can be booted to run in two modes: MaxCore mode and TurboCore mode. • MaxCore mode: Each 8-core Single Chip Module (SCM) operates with 32 MB of L3 cache. • TurboCore mode: Each 8-core SCM operates with up to four active cores and 32 MB of L3 cache. Thus, in TurboCore mode, there are fewer cores running with a higher core-to-L3-cache ratio (twice the L3 cache per core available).

2-12 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

EnergyScale IBM Power Systems

• EnergyScale is an IBM trademark. It consists of a built-in thermal power management device (TPMD) card and Power Executive software. • IBM Systems Director is also required to manage EnergyScale functions. • EnergyScale is used to dynamically optimize the processor performance versus processor power and system workload. • IBM Systems Director is also required to manage AEM functions and supports the following functions: – – – – – – – – – –

Power trending Thermal reporting Static energy saver mode Dynamic energy saver mode Energy capping Soft energy capping Processor nap Energy optimized fan control Altitude input Processor folding © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-8. EnergyScale

AN113.0

Notes: Energy trending EnergyScale provides continuous collection of real-time server energy consumption. This energy usage data can be displayed or exported by IBM Systems Director Active Energy Manager. Administrators can use such information to predict data center energy consumption at various times of the day, week, or month. Thermal reporting A measured ambient temperature and a calculated exhaust heat index temperature can be displayed from Active Energy Manager. This information can help identify data center hot-spots that need attention. Power Saver mode (or Static Energy Saver mode) This feature must be manually enabled/disabled. Static Energy Saver lowers the processor frequency and voltage, reducing the energy consumption of the system while still delivering

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 2. Hardware system overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-13

Student Notebook

predictable performance. This percentage is predetermined to be within a safe operating limit and is not user configurable. Energy Saver could be enabled based on regular variations in workloads, such as predictable dips in utilization over night, or over weekends. It can be used to reduce peak energy consumption, which can lower the cost of all power used. Dynamic Power Saver mode Dynamic Energy Saver varies processor frequency and voltage based on the utilization of the processors. The user must configure this setting from IBM Systems Director Active Energy Manager. Processor frequency and utilization are inversely proportional for most workloads, implying that as the frequency of a processor increases, its utilization decreases, given a constant workload. Dynamic Energy Saver takes advantage of this relationship to detect opportunities to save power, based on measured real-time system utilization. When a system is idle, the system firmware will lower the frequency and voltage to Static Energy Saver values. When fully utilized, the maximum frequency will vary, depending on whether the user favors power savings or system performance. If an administrator prefers energy savings and a system is fully-utilized, the system will reduce the maximum frequency to 95% of nominal values. If performance is favored over energy consumption, the maximum frequency will be at least 100% of nominal. Dynamic Energy Saver is mutually exclusive with Static Power Saver mode. Only one of these modes can be enabled at a given time. Power Capping (or Energy Capping) It is important to understand the differences between power capping and power savings. Power capping is used to allow the user to allocate less power and cooling to a system. This can help save on datacenter infrastructure costs, and then potentially allow more servers to be put into an existing infrastructure. Power savings is used to put the server into a mode that consumes less energy. Power Capping enforces a user specified limit on energy consumption. The user must set and enable an energy cap from the Active Energy Manager user interface. In most data centers and other installations, when a machine is installed, a certain amount of energy is allocated to it. Generally, the amount is what is considered to be a safe value, and it typically has a large margin of reserved, extra energy that is never used. This is called the margined power. The main purpose of the energy cap is not to save energy but rather to allow a data center operator the ability to reallocate energy from current systems to new systems by reducing the margin assigned to the existing machines. Soft Power Capping There are two power ranges into which the power cap can be set. When a power cap is set in the guaranteed range (Power Capping), the system is guaranteed to use less energy than the cap setting. Setting a energy cap in this region allows for the recovery of the margined power, but in many cases cannot be used to save energy. Soft power capping

2-14 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

extends the allowed energy capping range further, beyond a region that can be guaranteed in all configurations and conditions. If the energy management goal is to meet a particular energy consumption limit, then soft energy capping is the mechanism to use. Processor Nap The IBM POWER7 processor uses a low-power mode called Nap that stops processor execution when there is no work to do on that processor core. The latency of exiting Nap falls within a partition dispatch (context switch) such that the hypervisor firmware can use it as a general purpose idle state. When the operating system detects that a processor thread is idle, it yields control of a hardware thread to the hypervisor. The hypervisor immediately puts the thread into Nap. When the operating system yields control of the second thread and the processor core belongs to a dedicated processor partition, the second thread enters Nap mode. Energy-Optimized Fan Control and Altitude Input The Power Systems firmware will dynamically adjust fan speed based on energy consumption, altitude, ambient temperature, and energy savings modes. Systems are designed to operate in worst-case environments, in hot ambient temperatures, at high altitudes, and with high power components. In a typical case, one or more of these constraints are not valid. When no power savings setting is enabled, fan speed is based on ambient temperature, and assumes a high-altitude environment. When a power savings setting is enforced (either Static Energy Saver or Dynamic Energy Saver) fan speed will vary based on power consumption, ambient temperature, and altitude (if available). System altitude can also be set (Active Energy Manager). If no altitude is set, system will assume a default value of 350 meters above sea level. Processor folding Technique that dynamically adjusts, over the short-term, the number of processors available for dispatch to match the number of processors demanded by the workload. As the workload increases, the number of processors made available increases; as the workload decreases, the number of processors made available decreases. Processor folding increases energy savings during periods of low to moderate workload because unavailable processors remain in low-power idle states longer.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 2. Hardware system overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-15

Student Notebook

POWER7 offerings: Express versus Enterprise IBM Power Systems

IBM Power Blade Express servers

Power 710 Express Power 730 Express

Power 720 Express Power 740 Express

Power 750 Express Power 755

Power 770 Power 780

Power 775 Supercomputer

Power 795

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-9. POWER7 offerings: Express versus Enterprise

AN113.0

Notes: The main difference between the Express and Enterprise models is that the Enterprise servers include redundant components and concurrent repair for higher availability and protection of the system. Check the Power hardware web site for more details: http://www.ibm.com/systems/power/hardware/index.html

2-16 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Power Blade Express IBM Power Systems

PS704

PS703

PS702

PS701

PS700

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-10. Power Blade Express

AN113.0

Notes: Built on the proven foundation of the IBM BladeCenter family and featuring 4, 8,16 or 32 POWER7 cores, the BladeCenter PS700, PS701, PS702, PS703 and PS704 Express blades are ideal for scalable workloads that demand both cost and energy efficiency in a flexible package.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 2. Hardware system overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-17

Student Notebook

Power Blade Express at a glance IBM Power Systems

PS700

PS701

PS702

PS703

PS704

Power7 Processor cores

Four 64-bit 3.0 GHz

Eight 64-bit 3.0 GHz

16 64-bit 3.0 GHz

16 64-bit 2.4 GHz

32 64-bit 2.4 GHz

Level 2 (L2) cache

256 KB per processor core

256 KB per processor core

256 KB per processor core

256 KB per processor core

256 KB per processor core

Level 3 (L3) cache

4 MB per processor core

4 MB per processor core

4 MB per processor core

4 MB per processor core

4 MB per processor core

Memory (std/max)

8 GB / 64 GB per blade

16 GB / 128 GB per blade

32 GB / 128 GB per blade

16 GB / 256 GB per blade

32 GB / 512 GB per blade

Internal disk storage

Two 300 or 600 GB 2.5" SAS non hot-swappable HDD

One 300 or 600 GB 2.5" SAS non hot-swappable HDD

Two 300 or 600 GB 2.5“ SAS non hot-swappable HDD

One 300 or 600 GB 2.5“ SAS non hot-swappable HDD or two 1.8” 177 GB SSD

Two 300 or 600 GB 2.5” SAS non hot-swappable HDD or four 1.8” 177 GB SSD

Networking

IVE dual gigabit

IVE dual gigabit

IVE quad gigabit

Integrated dual gigabit Ethernet ports (virtualized Ethernet provided by PowerVM VIOS

Integrated dual gigabit Ethernet ports (virtualized Ethernet provided by PowerVM VIOS

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-11. Power Blade Express at a glance

AN113.0

Notes: The visual highlights the system features of the Power Blade Express servers.

2-18 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Power 710 / 730 Express IBM Power Systems

Size: 2U

6-Small Form Factor (SFF) bays with disk (or disk and tape)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-12. Power 710 and 730 Express

AN113.0

Notes: The Power 710 Express server is a 1-socket server supporting 4-core, 6-core or 8-core POWER7 processor modules in a dense 2U rack-optimized form factor. The Power 730 Express server is a two-socket server offering 8, 12 or 16 POWER7 cores in a dense, 2U rack-optimized form factor.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 2. Hardware system overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-19

Student Notebook

Power 710 Express at a glance IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-13. Power 710 Express at a glance

AN113.0

Notes: The visual highlights the system features of the Power 710 Express servers.

2-20 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Power 730 Express at a glance IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-14. Power 730 Express at a glance

AN113.0

Notes: The visual highlights the system features of the Power 730 Express servers.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 2. Hardware system overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-21

Student Notebook

Power 710 / 730 Express: Rear view IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-15. Power 710 / 730 Express: Rear view

AN113.0

Notes: The visual shows the rear view of the server showing, among other things, the different I/O options.

2-22 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Power 720 / 740 Express IBM Power Systems

Power 740 rack-mount

Power 720 / 740 tower

Size: 4U

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-16. Power 720 / 740 Express

AN113.0

Notes: The Power 720 Express server is a 1-socket server supporting 4-core, 6-core or 8-core POWER7 processor modules in a flexible rack-optimized or tower form factor. The Power 740 Express server is a 1- or 2-socket server supporting 4, 6, 8, 12 or 16 POWER7 cores in a flexible rack-optimized form factor.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 2. Hardware system overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-23

Student Notebook

Power 720 Express at a glance IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-17. Power 720 Express at a glance

AN113.0

Notes: The visual highlights the system features of the Power 720 Express servers.

2-24 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Power 740 Express at a glance IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-18. Power 740 Express at a glance

AN113.0

Notes: The visual highlights the system features of the Power 740 Express server.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 2. Hardware system overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-25

Student Notebook

Power 740 Express: Rear view IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-19. Power 740 Express: Rear view

AN113.0

Notes: The visual shows the rear view of the server showing, among other things, the different I/O options.

2-26 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Power 750 Express IBM Power Systems

rack-mount

Size: 4U

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-20. Power 750 Express

AN113.0

Notes: The Power 750 Express server is a 1 to 4-socket server supporting up to 32 cores using POWER7 6-core and 8-core processor modules.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 2. Hardware system overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-27

Student Notebook

Power 750 Express at a glance IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-21. Power 750 Express at a glance

AN113.0

Notes: The visual highlights the system features of the Power 750 Express server.

2-28 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Power 750 Express: Front view IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-22. Power 750 Express: Front view

AN113.0

Notes: The front view of the server is shown in the visual.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 2. Hardware system overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-29

Student Notebook

Power 750 Express: Rear view IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-23. Power 750: Rear view

AN113.0

Notes: The rear view of the server shows the different I/O options.

2-30 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Power 750 Express: Split backplane IBM Power Systems

• Power 750 split backplane feature: – Four SFF disk drives are assigned to the integrated SAS controller – Four SFF disk drives are assigned to the external rear SAS port – AIX/Linux, not IBM i

SAS port SAS port

AI-cable

750 system Adapter

< front

AI-cable

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-24. Power 750 Express: Split backplane

AN113.0

Notes: The Power 750 Express server supports the split backplane mode. If configured, the four small form factor (SFF) disk drives are assigned to the integrated SAS controller, and the four SFF disk drives are assigned to the external rear SAS port.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 2. Hardware system overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-31

Student Notebook

I/O drawer availability for Power 710/720/730/740/750 Express IBM Power Systems

720 Express

740 Express

750 Express

12X I/O Drawer PCIe, SFF disk (#5802)

X

X

X

12X I/O Drawer PCIe, No disk (#5877)

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

710 Express

Enclosures and expansion units

730 Express

12X I/O Drawer PCI-X DDR (#5796) EXP 12S SAS Drawer (#5886)

X

X

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-25. I/O drawer availability for Power 710/720/730/740/750 Express

AN113.0

Notes: The table shows the I/O drawer availability for Power 710, 720, 730, 740, and 750 Express.

2-32 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Power 755 IBM Power Systems

rack-mount

Size: 4U

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-26. Power 755

AN113.0

Notes: The Power 755 is a 4-socket, 32-core server with outstanding performance in a dense 4U rack-optimized package. Using 12X InfiniBand adapters up to 64 Power 755 nodes, each with 32 cores, can be clustered together providing up to 2,048 POWER7 cores.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 2. Hardware system overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-33

Student Notebook

Power 755 at a glance IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-27. Power 755 at a glance

AN113.0

Notes: The visual highlights the system features of the Power 755 server.

2-34 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Power 755 HPC cluster IBM Power Systems

• For high performance computing, a 64-node cluster could be configured – With 32 processor cores per node

• Data center in a rack • Up to 10 nodes per rack IB-DDR Interconnect

• Air cooled

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-28. Power 755 HPC cluster

AN113.0

Notes: The POWER7 755 can be configured to support clustered environments enabling HPC applications.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 2. Hardware system overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-35

Student Notebook

Power 770 IBM Power Systems

rack-mount

Size: 4U

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-29. Power 770

AN113.0

Notes: Easily scale up to 64 cores with the IBM Power 770. Unique IBM modular SMP architecture lets you add more powerful POWER7 processing capability exactly when needed. Innovative RAS features and leadership virtualization capabilities make the 770 well suited as a midrange application or database server, or for server consolidation. And the flexibility to use the leading-edge AIX, IBM i and Linux operating systems broadens the application offerings available and increases the ways clients can manage growth, complexity and risk.

2-36 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Power 770 at a glance IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-30. Power 770 at a glance

AN113.0

Notes: The visual highlights the system features of the Power 770 server.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 2. Hardware system overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-37

Student Notebook

Power 775 supercomputing IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-31. Power 775 supercomputing

AN113.0

Notes: The IBM Power 775 supercomputing server is designed for organizations that require a highly scalable system with extreme parallel processing performance and dense, modular packaging. Use it in clustered configurations of as few as 256 processor cores or in world-class supercomputer configurations of hundreds of thousands of processors. Combined with specialized software from IBM, this system is designed to perform and represents the latest Power technology available.

2-38 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Power 775 supercomputing at a glance IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-32. Power 775 supercomputing at a glance

AN113.0

Notes: The visual highlights the system features of the Power 775 server.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 2. Hardware system overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-39

Student Notebook

Power 780 IBM Power Systems

Maint coverage 24 X 7 PowerCare support

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-33. Power 780

AN113.0

Notes: Easily scale up to 64 cores with the IBM Power 780. Unique IBM modular SMP architecture lets you add more powerful POWER7 processing capability exactly when needed. Innovative RAS features and leadership virtualization capabilities make the 780 well suited as an application or database server, or for server consolidation. And the flexibility to use the leading-edge AIX, IBM i and Linux operating systems broadens the application offerings available and increases the ways clients can manage growth, complexity and risk.

2-40 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Power 780 at a glance IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-34. Power 780 at a glance

AN113.0

Notes: The visual highlights the system features of the Power 780 server.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 2. Hardware system overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-41

Student Notebook

Power 770/780: Front view IBM Power Systems

Fans

Fabric interconnects

DVD

Op panel

Six SFF bays

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-35. Power 770/780: Front view

AN113.0

Notes: The front view of the server is shown in the visual.

2-42 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Power 770/780: Rear view IBM Power Systems

FSP connectors

Two GX++ bays

HMC HMC ports Ports P C I e

P C I e

P C I e

P C I e

P C I e

P C I e

Two power supplies

SPCN ports

IVE ports

USB ports

Serial port

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-36. Power 770/780: Rear view

AN113.0

Notes: This visual depicts the rear view of a Power 770 or 780. The focus here is the I/O and the Power/Thermal subsystems; from the GX++ and PCIe slots to the HMC ports connections. This also shows the System Power Control Network (SPCN) connections as well.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 2. Hardware system overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-43

Student Notebook

Power 795 IBM Power Systems

Maint coverage 24 X 7 PowerCare support

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-37. Power 795

AN113.0

Notes: The IBM Power 795 server uses 64-bit POWER7 eight-core processor technology in up to 256-core configurations with PowerVM virtualization. This enterprise Power server offers leadership performance and massive scalability, along with the reliability, manageability and security features needed to consolidate AIX, IBM i, and Linux applications in the largest and most demanding data center environments.

2-44 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Power 795 at a glance IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-38. Power 795 at a glance

AN113.0

Notes: The visual highlights the system features of the Power 795 server.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 2. Hardware system overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-45

Student Notebook

Power 795 layout IBM Power Systems

Bulk power supply

Network hub Light panel

Media drawer

Node controller (2X)

Processor/memory Book nodes

System controller (2X)

Midplane

Clock (2X) I/O hub Up to four per node

I/O drawers (3X)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-39. Power 795 layout

AN113.0

Notes: The visual depicts the major Power 795 subsystems. The power subsystem is at the top of the frame, the processor subsystems (that is, the CEC) is in the middle and I/O subsystem is at the bottom.

2-46 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Power 795 processor / memory book node IBM Power Systems

TPMD (2) DIMMs GX bus

Node cntrl Node cntrl

P7 P7

DCA bulk power DCA bulk power

DIMMs

GX bus GX bus GX bus

P7 P7

Four POWER7 chips / up to 1 TB memory Four GX Ports / two node controllers 32 DIMM slots per node Two TPMD / node

DIMM size 8 GB 16 GB 32 GB

Memory speed 1067 MHz 1067 MHz 1067 MHz

Offering size Max memory 32 GB 2 TB 64 GB 4 TB 128 GB 8 TB

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-40. Power 795 processor / memory book node

AN113.0

Notes: The visual shows a diagram of Power 795 processor book as well as the possible memory DIMM size options that you can configure. Also notice the positioning of the four POWER7 chips and their associated memory slots. The four GX ports are mounted in the front of the Processor modules whereas the two Distributed Controller Assemblies (DCA) are housed in the back. Two standard Thermal Power Management Devices (TPMD) are displayed as well.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 2. Hardware system overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-47

Student Notebook

I/O drawer availability for Power 755/770/780/795 IBM Power Systems

Enclosures and expansion units

755

12X I/O Drawer PCIe, SFF disk

770

780

X

X

X

X

X

X

795

(#5802) 12X I/O Drawer PCIe , No

disk (#5877) 12X I/O Drawer PCI-X DDR (#5796 and #7314) 12X I/O Drawer PCI-X

X

(#5797 and #5798) 12X I/O drawer PCIe

X

(#5803 and #5873) EXP 12S SAS Drawer (#5886)

X

EXP 24 SAS Drawer

X

X

X

(#5786, #5787, #7031)

X X

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-41. I/O drawer availability for Power 755/770/780/795

AN113.0

Notes: The table shows the I/O drawer availability for Power 755, 770, 780, and 795 servers.

2-48 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

I/O drawer example: 12X I/O Drawer PCI-X DDR (#5796) IBM Power Systems

Rear view (No disk drives in front)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-42. I/O drawer example: 12X I/O Drawer PCI-X DDR (#5796)

AN113.0

Notes: The PCI-DDR 12X Expansion Drawer (#5796) is a 4U (EIA units) drawer and mounts in a 19-inch rack.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 2. Hardware system overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-49

Student Notebook

I/O drawer example: 12X I/O Drawer PCIe, SFF disk (#5802) IBM Power Systems

front view

rear view

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-43. I/O drawer example: 12X I/O Drawer PCIe, SFF disk (#5802)

AN113.0

Notes: The 12X I/O Drawer PCIe, SFF disk (#5802) is a 19-inch I/O and storage drawer. It provides a 4U-tall (EIA units) drawer containing 10 PCIe-based I/O adapter slots and 18 SAS hot-swap Small Form Factor disk bays, which can be used for either HDD or SSD.

2-50 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

I/O location codes IBM Power Systems

• Types of location codes: – Physical location codes refer to a specific component. • A physical location code is a sequence of location labels that, when followed in order, leads to the resource.

– Operating system location codes also refer to components and use a different convention. • Example hdisk0:

03-08-00-3,0 -> SCSI disk drive

• Example hdisk0:

00-08-00

-> SAS disk drive

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-44. I/O location codes

AN113.0

Notes: A physical location code is a sequence of location labels that, when followed in order, lead to the location. On a given system, a resource has only one physical location code. It is necessary to interpret physical location codes in a variety of situations. Service error logs, partition configuration screens, and inventory reports all report location codes. Operating systems also refer to devices by their own location codes. It is often important to translate between the operating system location code and the physical location code; for example, if you want to determine which physical disk to set as the boot disk.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 2. Hardware system overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-51

Student Notebook

Physical location code convention IBM Power Systems

• Physical location code format – Utttt.mmm.sssssss-additional device information Unit Machine type . Unit Model Number . Unit serial number

• Example physical location code – U78A0.001.DNWGCP5-P1-C1-T1 • • • • •

P1 specifies I/O planar 1. C1 specifies card slot 1. After a card slot, a T followed by a number specifies a particular port. If no card slot, a T followed by a number specifies an integrated slot. An L followed by a number specifies a logical path identifier specific to the protocol being used (for example, SCSI identifiers).

• SAS adapter example – U78A0.001.DNWGCP5-P1-T9

PCI-X266 Planar 3Gb SAS adapter

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-45. Physical location code convention

AN113.0

Notes: Physical location code format Servers (system unit and expansion units) use physical location codes to provide mapping of replaceable units. Location codes are produced by the server's firmware, which structures them so that they can be broken down to identify specific parts in a system. Physical location codes are formed by concatenating one or more location labels together. Location labels start at the largest or most general resource (the unit) and proceed to the most specific in order of containment. The location labels are separated by dashes (-). Drawers for which the system can obtain the machine type, model, and serial number will have a unit location code composed of the machine type and serial number. Unit numbers These are the unit numbers that you will see in the location codes for the components in the system drawer or the central electronics complex (CEC). For PCI-X slots in attached I/O drawers, the unit number of the drawer will be used.

2-52 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

View location codes: From the HMC GUI IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-46. View location codes: From the HMC GUI

AN113.0

Notes: The visual presents the HMC GUI properties panel showing the location codes of the physical I/O resources for a managed system.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 2. Hardware system overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-53

Student Notebook

View location codes: From AIX IBM Power Systems

• Use lscfg to see physical location codes: Fibre Channel adapter

– For hdisk0

# lscfg | grep hdisk0 * hdisk0 U5877.001.M09J13D-P1-C3-T1-W500507680140B855-L0 MPIO IBM 2145 FC Disk Port T1 of the Fibre Channel adapter

– For Ethernet adapter

# lscfg | grep en Model Implementation: Multiple Processor, PCI bus + ent0 U78A0.001.DNWK37K-P1-C6-T2 Ethernet Port (lp-hea)

Logical Host

Ethernet controller

• Use lsdev to see AIX location code: – For disk drive # lsdev -Cc disk hdisk0 Available 00-00-02 MPIO IBM 2145 FC Disk

– For Ethernet adapter # lsdev | grep ent ent0 Available

Logical Host Ethernet Port (lp-hea) © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-47. View location codes: From AIX

AN113.0

Notes: The AIX commands in the visual show how you can view both physical location codes and the correlating AIX codes.

2-54 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Flexible service processor IBM Power Systems

• Functions of the flexible service processor include: – – – –

System initialization Connection to the HMC Web-based Advanced System Management Interface (ASMI) for setting system flags Hardware error detection

• Connects to HMC over network: – Server processor’s IP address set by HMC DHCP server • This can be changed through ASM interface.

• To find IP address of a service processor connected to an HMC, use one of the following HMC commands: $ lssyscfg -r sys -F name,ipaddr,state sys404,192.168.255.35,Operating $ lssysconn -r all resource_type=sys,type_model_serial_num=8233E8B*10000AP,sp=primary,sp_phys_loc=U78A0.001.DNWK37KP1,ipaddr=192.168.255.35,alt_ipaddr=unavailable,state=Connected

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-48. Flexible service processor

AN113.0

Notes: The flexible service processor (FSP) performs many vital reliability, availability, and serviceability (RAS) functions. The service processor is an embedded unit running the service processor internal operating system, which contains programs and device drivers. The service processor gives the means to diagnose, check status, and sense operational conditions of a remote system, even when the main processor is inoperable. The service processor enables firmware and operating system surveillance, several remote power controls, environmental monitoring, reset, and boot features, remote maintenance and diagnostic activities.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 2. Hardware system overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-55

Student Notebook

Advanced System Management interface (1 of 2) IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-49. Advanced System Management interface (1 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: With the system in power standby mode, or with an operating system in control of the machine, or controlling the related partition, the service processor is working and checking the system for errors, ensuring the connection to the HMC for manageability purposes. With the system up and running, the service processor provides the possibility to view and change the Power-On settings using the Advanced System Management Interface. Also, the surveillance function of the service processor is monitoring the operating system to check that it is still running and has not stalled. Accessing ASMI If the service processor is connected to an open network, you can access the Advanced System Management Interface using a web browser connection to the IP address of the service processor. You must log in with the general or admin ID and password. You can also access the ASMI from the HMC. Select the server name, then from the Tasks menu, select Operations, then Launch Advanced System Management (ASM).

2-56 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Advanced System Management interface (2 of 2) IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-50. Advanced System Management interface (2 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: This is the welcome menu of the Advanced System Management interface. You must log in with the general or admin ID and password.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 2. Hardware system overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-57

Student Notebook

ASMI example IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-51. ASMI example

AN113.0

Notes: The ASMI application is easy to navigate. The visual shows one example screen of the network configuration for one of the Ethernet ports connected to the service processor. If you were to expand all menus, you would see a list of options like this one. The exact list that is available will depend on the managed system firmware version.

2-58 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Checkpoint (1 of 2) IBM Power Systems

1. List the major components that make up an IBM Power Systems server. 2. What is the main difference between the Express and Enterprise Power models? 3. How many cores are available on POWER7 processor chips. 4. What is the TurboCore mode?

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-52. Checkpoint (1 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 2. Hardware system overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-59

Student Notebook

Checkpoint (2 of 2) IBM Power Systems

5. List at least three functions of the flexible service processor. 6. What is the EnergyScale technology? 7. What is a location code?

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-53. Checkpoint (2 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes:

2-60 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Exercise: System hardware components IBM Power Systems

Unit exerc ise

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-54. Exercise: System hardware components

AN113.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 2. Hardware system overview

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

2-61

Student Notebook

Unit summary IBM Power Systems

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: • Identify basic architecture elements and hardware components of IBM POWER7 processor-based systems • Discuss the different POWER7 server options: Express versus Enterprise • Describe the functions of the service processor • Describe physical location code conventions • Use AIX commands to view location codes

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-55. Unit summary

AN113.0

Notes: More summary information: • IBM POWER7 processor-based systems have a wide range of configuration options: - Processors, memory, I/O, partitions • There are both physical and AIX location codes. • The service processor provides system initialization and hardware error detection functions, and the connection to the HMC. • The ASM Interface tool can be used to alter the service processor configuration.

2-62 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console What this unit is about This unit describes functions and configuration options for the Hardware Management Console (HMC).

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • List the LPAR-related functions of the HMC • Describe how to connect the HMC to the managed system • Describe the new HMC version 7 web-based management console and the web user interface (WUI) structure • Use the Guided Setup wizard to set configuration options • Add a managed system to the HMC application • Reboot the HMC • Configure the HMC network parameters • Create HMC users • Configure and assign task roles and managed resource roles • Configure HMC remote access options • Enable and disable remote virtual console support • Log in to the HMC command line and use HMC commands • Describe security options for HMC communication

How you will check your progress Accountability: • Checkpoint questions • Machine exercises

References http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/systems/index.jsp  IBM System p and AIX Information Center

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-1

Student Notebook

Unit objectives IBM Power Systems

After completing this unit, you should be able to: • List the LPAR-related functions of the HMC • Describe how to connect the HMC to the managed system • Describe the new HMC version 7 web-based management console and the web user interface (WUI) structure • Use the Guided Setup wizard for HMC network configuration • Add a managed system to the HMC application • Reboot the HMC • Configure the HMC network parameters • Create HMC users • Configure and assign task roles and managed resource roles • Configure HMC remote access options • Enable and disable remote virtual console support • Log in to the HMC command line and use HMC commands • Describe security options for HMC communication © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-1. Unit objectives

AN113.0

Notes: You should be able to describe the HMC’s functions and features and be able to configure users and network options by the end of this unit. The unit is separated into two topics. The first covers the HMC and its configuration. The second covers creating HMC users, how to access the HMC remotely, and the security issues associated with remote access.

3-2

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

3.1. HMC overview

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-3

Student Notebook

Topic 1 objectives IBM Power Systems

After completing this topic, you should be able to: • List the LPAR-related functions of the HMC • Describe how to connect the HMC to the managed system • Describe the new HMC V7 web-based management console and web user interface (WUI) structure • Use the Guided Setup wizard for HMC network configuration • Add a managed system to the HMC application • Reboot the HMC • Configure the HMC network parameters

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-2. Topic 1 objectives

AN113.0

Notes: The first topic in this unit covers the features of the HMC version 7 with the web user interface structure and how to configure a new HMC out of the box.

3-4

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Power Systems management consoles IBM Power Systems

• Power systems can be managed by the following Power Systems management consoles (PSMCs): – Hardware Management Console (HMC) – Integrated Virtualization Manager (IVM) – Systems Director Management Console (SDMC)

• Terminology: – The HMC and IVM manage LPARs and servers/managed systems – The SDMC manages virtual servers and hosts

• A host can be managed by both an SDMC and an HMC at the same time.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-3. Power Systems Management Consoles

AN113.0

Notes: The Power Systems server line offers three types of management consoles, depending on your environment and requirements. 1. HMC: Hardware Management Console is used to manage one or more servers. All management tasks can be done directly from the HMC, including partitioning the system. All system events and state information is forwarded to the HMC. 2. IVM: Integrated Virtualization Manager offers a lower cost of entry into virtualization on IBM POWER processor-based servers, since it does not require the use of a separate hardware appliance like the Hardware Management Console (HMC) or Systems Director Management Console (SDMC) for managing logical partitions (LPARs) on a single system. IVM is packaged in the Virtual I/O Server (VIOS) software. 3. SDMC: The Systems Director Management Console is the successor to the HMC and the IVM. SDMC supports POWER6 and POWER7 processor-based systems, including Power Systems blades.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-5

Student Notebook

Hardware Management Console IBM Power Systems

• HMC is a PC-based console used in the configuration and management of partitions. – Runs custom Linux and Java application – Is remotely accessible: • Command line and browser-based graphical user interfaces

Rack-mount HMC

– Can be set up for redundancy

• It provides the following: – LPAR configuration and operation management – Virtual console windows for partitions – Capacity on demand (CoD) management – Service tools

Deskside HMC

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-4. Hardware Management Console

AN113.0

Notes: The Hardware Management Console is a dedicated system that provides a graphical and command-line user interface for the configuration and management of logical partitions on Power Systems servers. The HMC is a customized Intel-based PC, available in a desktop or a rack-mount model, running Linux with a Java-based management application. You cannot load any other applications onto the HMC. The major functions of the HMC are for power on/off of the managed system, for LPAR creation and operations, for access to the partitions’ consoles, for Capacity on Demand resource management, and for serviceable events management and connection to the IBM service organization. A second HMC can be connected to a single managed system for redundancy. Multiple managed systems can be managed by a single HMC. The managed system continues to operate in the absence of an HMC by using partition configuration information stored in NVRAM. Individual partitions can be rebooted using a shut down command in the partition’s operating system. The managed system can be

3-6

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

powered off and on, and will restart predefined partitions automatically if the HMC is not available. However, performing configuration changes to the partitions requires the HMC. If an HMC is used to manage a POWER7 server, the HMC must be a rack-mount HMC model CR3 (or later), or deskside HMC model C05 (or later). Check the Power Systems Infocenter for the latest information about the HMC hardware and software.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-7

Student Notebook

Latest available HMCs IBM Power Systems

• 7042-CR6 rack-mounted HMC

• 7042-C08 deskside HMC:

– 2.53 GHz Intel Quad-core processor with 12 MB L2 cache – 4 GB (2 x 2 GB) of 1,333 MHz DDR3 system memory – 500 GB SATA SFF HDD – SATA CD/RW - DVD-RAM

– 2.53 GHz Intel Quad-core processor with 8 MB L2 cache – 4 GB (2 x 2 GB) of 1333 MHz DDR3 system memory – 250 GB SATA 3.5-inch HDD – SATA CD/RW - DVD-RAM

– – – –

– Integrated dual-port Gigabit Ethernet controller – Optional dual-port Gigabit Ethernet available

Four Ethernet ports Four USB ports (two front, two rear) One PCIe slot One PCI-X slot

– Seven USB ports (two front, four rear, one internal) – Two PCI-X slots – Three PCIe slots

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-5. Latest available HMCs

AN113.0

Notes: The visual shows the HMC system attributes associated with the different HMC machine types and models.

3-8

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

HMC connection to the server IBM Power Systems

POWER processor-based managed system

AIX

Linux

Unassigned resources

HMC

Partition 2

Partition 1

Non-volatile RAM

Hypervisor

Service processor

Processors Memory I/O Slots

LPAR allocation tables

Ethernet Partition configuration information is kept both on HMCs and in server’s NVRAM.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-6. HMC connection to the server

AN113.0

Notes: This visual brings together several concepts: • Partitions are independent operating environments and their resources are managed by the hypervisor. The hypervisor manages the resources for the partitions. • NVRAM is used on the managed system to hold a copy of the partition configuration so that if the HMC or the network were to fail, the partitions can continue to run and even reboot if necessary. • Partitions are configured and managed on the HMC which is a separate system. A copy of the partition configuration data is also kept on the HMC (in addition to NVRAM). • The HMC is connected to the managed system through an Ethernet connection to the service processor. The service processor is a separate, independent processor that provides hardware initialization during system load, monitoring of environmental and error events, and maintenance support. • Two HMCs can be connected to a managed system to provided HMC redundancy. Either HMC can be used for operations and they remain synchronized. • An HMC (or pair of HMCs) can managed multiple managed systems.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-9

Student Notebook

HMC: Managed system and LPAR communications IBM Power Systems

• Service processor: – – – –

HMC SSL communication Power control Error event handling Hypervisor code updates

• Hypervisor (pass-through): – – – – – –

System configuration data Partitioning control Virtual I/O definition Capacity on demand Concurrent service Console sessions

• Operating systems: – – – –

External LAN connection Gather hardware error events Gather hardware inventory Dynamic LPAR (AIX/Linux) © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-7. HMC: Managed System and LPAR communications

AN113.0

Notes: The HMC needs to communicate with the FSP, the POWER Hypervisor as well as the operating system that’s running within the LPAR.

3-10 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Configuring a new HMC IBM Power Systems

• Checklist to set a new HMC: – Power on the HMC. • Do not plug in the managed system yet!

– Log in locally as hscroot. – Use Guided Setup wizard to configure HMC. • Configure the following: Date/time, hscroot and root passwords, add users, configure networking, configure service provider, connection monitoring.

– – – –

Reboot the HMC. Check the HMC software version. Upgrade HMC software if necessary. Connect network cables to HMC and service processor. • HMC1 port on service processor connects to first Ethernet port on HMC.

– Apply power to managed systems. – Set access passwords. – Apply any activation codes. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-8. Configuring a new HMC

AN113.0

Notes: Connect the HMC to the network and power it on. You will see the Linux initialization messages and then will be prompted to log in. The default login account and password for the HMC is hscroot and abc123. Because this is the same on all HMCs, you should change the password immediately. New passwords must be at least seven characters. If this is a new HMC, you will automatically be prompted to run the Guided Setup wizard which will help you set up a few critical options. You can re-run this wizard at any time, or access the individual configuration options separately. One configuration check that the Guided Setup wizard does not do is check to be sure the software version is up to date. How to check the version and upgrade the software will be covered in a later unit in this course. If you change the network configuration, you will need to restart the HMC. Connect the managed system to the HMC Connect the HMC1 port on the managed system to the first integrated Ethernet port on the HMC. When the HMC networking is fully configured and the Ethernet cable between the © Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-11

Student Notebook

HMC and the managed system is connected, then you can plug in the managed system to the power source. For redundant HMCs, the second HMC connects to the HMC2 port on the managed system. Never connect the same HMC to both ports.

3-12 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

HMC V7 web UI: Overview IBM Power Systems

• • • • • •

Supports POWER5/6/7 processor-based server systems Real http / https GUI – no need for WebSM interface Leverage modern, familiar UI paradigms and technologies Unify HMC family of user interfaces: z,p,i, Storage, and IVM Consistent user experience across HMC and IBM web UI family Navigation: – – – – – – –

Simplification – some tasks rearranged Improving task discovery and reduce task depth Consistent task placement Consistent task categorization Display more information in main views Simplify complex functional areas Task list available multiple ways (task list, Tasks button, right-click)

• New functions: – – – – – – –

Status bar View users logged on Disconnect / reconnect Custom groups Ability to customize which columns are displayed Table filtering and sorting Supports and enables significant new features and functionality, such as Live Partition Mobility © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-9. HMC V7 web UI: Overview

AN113.0

Notes: The visual shows a summary of the HMC V7 capabilities.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-13

Student Notebook

HMC pre-login welcome screen IBM Power Systems

• Connect by pointing your web browser to: – https://

Launch HMC web application.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-10. HMC pre-login welcome screen

AN113.0

Notes: This HMC uses a web-based user interface. This interface uses a tree-style navigation model providing hierarchical views of system resources and tasks using drill-down and launch-in-context techniques to enable direct access to hardware resources and task management capabilities. It provides views of system resources and provides tasks for system administration. The Welcome window contains the link to log in to the HMC application, the ability to view the online help information, and the summarized status information for the HMC. Click the Log on and launch link to get to the login screen. Notice that you can access online help and see system status before logging in.

3-14 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

HMC login sessions IBM Power Systems

• Default root login is hscroot with default password of abc123. • Concept of multiple login sessions per user: – Is an important reason for creating unique logins for different users.

• When logging out, choose: – Disconnect and your session ends, but tasks continue running. • You can reconnect to this session later.

– Log off and your session ends, ending all tasks.

• Reconnect and choose to continue a session or start a new one.

This is the default account. Other accounts can be created.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-11. HMC login sessions

AN113.0

Notes: The default administrator login for the HMC is hscroot. You cannot log directly into the HMC with the Linux root password. Additional accounts can be created and these can have the same hscroot access to objects and tasks, or a particular account can have a specific subset of objects and tasks that it can use. When you log out of the HMC, you use either the Log off option or the Disconnect option. A disconnect will leave any running tasks running and allow you to reconnect to that session later. Log off will stop any running tasks and log you out completely.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-15

Student Notebook

Disconnect versus logoff IBM Power Systems

Logoff command

Choose Log off or Disconnect.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-12. Disconnect versus logoff

AN113.0

Notes: Logging off Click Logoff in the upper right corner of the HMC interface to log off or disconnect.

3-16 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Reconnecting to login session (1 of 2) IBM Power Systems

Number of tasks still running.

Reconnect to the selected session. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-13. Reconnecting to login session (1 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: The reconnect function shows why it is a good idea now to create separate users for the HMC if there will be multiple people logging into the HMC. If everyone logs in as hscroot, then when you reconnect, you might reconnect to someone else’s session.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-17

Student Notebook

Reconnecting to login session (2 of 2) IBM Power Systems

Tasks continued running.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-14. Reconnecting to login session (2 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: The visual shows that when you reconnect, any running tasks are still active. This will allow the user to resume what they were doing the last time they logged on or start a new session.

3-18 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

HMC Welcome screen after login IBM Power Systems

Task bar

Navigation

Status bar

Work area © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-15. HMC Welcome screen after login

AN113.0

Notes: When you successfully log in to the HMC GUI, you will see the Welcome screen. From here you can view the clickable major applications in the navigation bar, and you will see a summary of the current status of servers that this HMC manages in the status bar. The work area will provide more information about the applications in the navigation bar, and the banner and task bar area will be along the top of the window. The task bar will show any running tasks. In the example in the visual, there are no current running tasks and the status bar shows that there is at least one attention LED on an object. The status bar icons are clickable to drill-down to get more information. The banner, across the top of the workplace window, identifies the product and logo. It is optionally displayed and is set by using the Change User Interface Settings task. The Navigation pane, in the left portion of the window, contains the primary navigation links for managing your system resources and the Hardware Management Console. The items are referred to as nodes.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-19

Student Notebook

The Work pane, in the right portion of the window, displays information based on the current selection from the Navigation pane. For example, when Welcome is selected in the Navigation pane, the Welcome window content is displayed in the Work pane, as shown in the figure. The Status bar, in the bottom left portion of the window, provides visual indicators of current overall system status. It also contains a status overview icon, which can be selected to display more detailed status information in the Work pane. You can resize the panes of the Hardware Management Console workplace by moving the mouse pointer over the border that separates the Navigation pane from the Work pane until the mouse pointer changes to a double-pointed arrow. When the pointer changes shape, press and hold the left mouse button while dragging the mouse pointer to the left or right. Release the button and your Navigation pane or Work pane is now larger or smaller in size. You can also do this within the Work pane border that separates the resources table from the Tasks pad.

3-20 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

HMC V7 user interface: Overall structure IBM Power Systems

Task bar

Logoff

Work area

Navigation Status bar Task pad

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-16. HMC V7 user interface: Overall structure

AN113.0

Notes: Navigation area The navigation area, as shown in the visual, contains the primary navigation links for managing your system resources and the Hardware Management Console. Access the different applications listed in the navigation bar by clicking their names. The work area part of the window will change depending on the application. The Servers application will show a list of all servers being managed by this HMC. If you click a specific server’s name, it will show a table of all of its LPARs. We’ll look at these two table views more closely. The rest of the applications will help you configure a server using system plans, configure and monitor the HMC, manage any serviceable events that have been logged by any of the partitions, and manage software updates to both the HMC itself and to the firmware of the servers.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-21

Student Notebook

Task bar The Task bar provides the capability of an active task switcher. The Task bar can be used as a navigation aid to move between tasks that were launched and have not yet been closed. The task switcher does not pause or resume existing tasks. Clicking a task in the Task bar brings that task's window forward and gives it focus. The right end of the Task bar also contains the following information as shown in the visual: • User ID that you are logged in as. By clicking the user ID, you launch the Change User Interface Settings task. • Help displays information about all the tasks on the Hardware Management Console and how to use the web-based user interface on the Hardware Management Console. • Logoff launches the Logoff or Disconnect task. Tasks pad The Tasks pad displays below the Work Area when you have selected Systems Management or System Plans in the Navigation Area. This view contains available tasks for selected managed objects. The content of the Tasks pad changes when different objects are selected in the Work Area. The Tasks pad is resizeable by moving the mouse pointer over the border that separates the Work pane from the Tasks pad. Status bar The Status bar in the bottom left pane provides an at a glance view of overall system status, including managed system resources and the Hardware Management Console. A status-sensitive title, background color, and icons are part of the Status bar. The status indicators (icons) appear in color when one or more objects go into unacceptable status, have attention LEDs, or have open serviceable events; otherwise, the status icon is greyed out.

3-22 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Flexibility: Launching tasks IBM Power Systems

Tasks menu

Context menu button

Tasks grouped into standard categories.

Task pad

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-17. Flexibility: Launching tasks

AN113.0

Notes: Accessing tasks You can access tasks from the task pad, the tasks menu, or the selected menu next to the object. Also, if the task is running, you can click the task in the Task bar. Running tasks The Task bar not only shows running tasks, it also provides the capability to switch the active task. The Task bar can be used as a navigation aid to move between tasks that were launched and have not yet been closed. Switching tasks does not pause or resume existing tasks. Clicking a task in the Task bar brings that task’s window forward and gives it focus. Tasks menu The Tasks menu displays on the table toolbar. The Tasks menu is only available for table selections. For example, in the Select column of the Servers Work pane table, select the object with which you want to work. (A check mark displays.) Click Tasks for the list of the applicable task groups for the selected objects in the table. Select a task group; then select

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-23

Student Notebook

a task to launch for the object. If more than one object is selected, the tasks that display in the menu apply to all selections. Not all tasks can be performed on more than one selected object as the same time. If you attempt one of these tasks, a window opens requiring you to select the one system on which to perform the task. Context menus The context menu lists the task groups appropriate for the selected object. Context menus are available for table selections only. For example, in the Select column of the Servers Work pane table, select the object with which you want to work. (A check mark displays.) The context menu button (double right arrows) appears next to the object name you have selected. Click the button and the Task Groups menu displays for that particular object. Then select a task to launch for the object. If more than one object is selected, the tasks that appear in the context menus apply to all selections. Not all tasks can be performed on more than one selected object as the same time. If you attempt one of these tasks, a window opens display requiring you to select the one system on which to perform the task. Task bar The Task bar provides the capability of an active task switcher. The Task bar can be used as a navigation aid to move between tasks that were launched and have not yet been closed. The task switcher does not pause or resume existing tasks. Clicking a task in the Task bar brings that task's window forward and gives it focus.

3-24 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Server table view IBM Power Systems

• Default server table view shows status, available (free) CPU and memory resources, and any current reference codes. • Select a server to access tasks available for that server.

Click Servers to see a list of servers. Then select the check box to see tasks available for that server.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-18. Server table view

AN113.0

Notes: To list all servers being managed by the HMC, click the Servers link in the Navigation bar. In the example in the visual, there are two servers: sys304 and sys306. To select a server, select the check box in the Select column. The default server table view shows available memory and processing resources and the status. If there was a current reference code, then it would show as well. Example tasks to run for a selected server are to view its properties or to power it off.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-25

Student Notebook

LPAR table view IBM Power Systems

• Default LPAR table view includes name, status, configured CPU and memory resources, operating systems, and reference code. • Select a partition to access tasks available for that partition.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-19. LPAR table view

AN113.0

Notes: In the example shown in the visual, the sys304 managed system has been selected under Servers in the navigation bar. This will show all LPARs configured on the system, whether they are running or not. This view will show basic configuration information for the partitions plus their status. In the example in the visual, no partitions are selected. The list of tasks when no partitions are selected is different than when a partition or partitions are selected (by selecting the check box in the Select column).

3-26 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

LPAR consoles IBM Power Systems

• The HMC provides the ability to access a partition’s console. – Only one permitted for each LPAR at a time.

• To access from the GUI, select a running partition and use the Console Window > Open Terminal Window task. • If the window will not open because there is one already open, you can use Close Terminal Connection first.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-20. LPAR consoles

AN113.0

Notes: From the LPAR table view, you can select partitions and run tasks specific to that partition. One common task is to open a partition’s console window. Open a virtual (console) terminal window for a running partition If there is not an open virtual terminal window for an active partition, you can select the partition and run the Console Window > Open Terminal Window task. Close a (console) terminal window There are two ways to close a virtual terminal. • The preferred, usual method of closing a terminal window on a PC is to click the X in the upper right corner of the terminal window. This removes the window from the desktop and closes the connection. • You might need to force a virtual terminal window to close by selecting the partition name in the Server Management area of the HMC, right-clicking, and choosing Close Terminal Connection. Use this procedure when the virtual terminal window is open on another HMC (or remotely from a browser) and you want to turn off that session or as a recovery in case you cannot close the window for some reason.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-27

Student Notebook

HMC online help and documentation IBM Power Systems

• HMC online help: – The Help link is always available in the upper right part of the task bar.

– Help buttons on task windows give context sensitive help. – You can search for topics from the help screen.

• Main HMC documentation: – Operations Guide for the HMC and Managed Systems (SA76-0085) • Available from the Resource Link site: http://www.ibm.com/servers/resourcelink

– Hardware Management Console V7 Handbook (SG24-7491) • An IBM Redbooks document available from www.redbooks.ibm.com

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-21. HMC online help and documentation

AN113.0

Notes: To get more information about how to use the HMC, you can access the online help facility from the HMC itself, or access the Operations Guide available on the Internet. There is also a link to the online HMC help screens from the pre-login screen. In addition, when we discuss the HMC command-line interface later in this course, you will see that HMC commands have man pages accessible from the command line.

3-28 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

HMC V7 documentation IBM Power Systems

• Follow the links on the HMC welcome screen for support information, tutorials, and documentation.

Online documentation © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-22. HMC V7 documentation

AN113.0

Notes: Online links are available from the HMC Welcome screen. An HMC tutorial and documentation are available from Resource Link. Resource Link requires a unique login account and password.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-29

Student Notebook

Work area: Tables IBM Power Systems

• Toolbar features: Select/Deselect all, filtering, sorting, column display and ordering. ordering – Note: Toolbar details are shown on the next chart. Item selection

Column sizing

Toolbar

Summary

Click to sort

Scrolling

– Note: Shift-select to select a range. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-23. Work area: Tables

AN113.0

Notes: When you click a managed server in the Navigation area, the Work pane displays the list of partitions defined on the server. If you click the Column configuration icon on the table toolbar, optional attributes display. This function enables you to select additional attributes that you want displayed as columns in the table. It also allows you to reorder the columns. Displaying server and partition details To display details (properties) about a server or partition, you can select the server (or partition) by clicking in the Select column in the Work pane table. Then you can either click Properties from the Tasks pad or click the double-arrow icon next to the server (or partition) name and click Properties from the context menu. In both cases, the Properties window opens.

3-30 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Toolbar features IBM Power Systems

• Select all: Select all of the items which are shown in the current table view. • Deselect all • Show filter row: Filter according to specified text. – Contains, does not contain, starts with, ends with, matches, is empty, is not empty

• Clear all filters • Edit sort: Up to three sort fields can be specified. Sort by ascending/descending. – Name, ID, status, processing units, memory, active profile, type, reference code, processor, service partition, configured, default profile

• Clear all sorts • Configure columns: Select which columns to display. – Name, ID, Status, Processing Units, Memory, Active Profile, Type, Reference Code, Processor, Service partition, Configured, Default Profile

• Reset columns: Reset column order, visibility, and width. • Note: These settings (for each user ID) are preserved between sessions. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-24. Toolbar features

AN113.0

Notes: The toolbar is extremely useful and flexible for adjusting the information on display.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-31

Student Notebook

Flexibility: Filtering columns IBM Power Systems

Filters

Filter text

Filter results © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-25. Flexibility: Filtering columns

AN113.0

Notes: The display area can be easily changed by using filters. This greatly improves flexibility.

3-32 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Flexibility: Sort options IBM Power Systems

Sort indicator

Sort

Sort on multiple columns

Sort fields

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-26. Flexibility: Sort options

AN113.0

Notes: The work area data can be displayed in a particular sort order.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-33

Student Notebook

Flexibility: Custom groups IBM Power Systems

• Create groups of objects (for example, servers and LPARs): – Group by location, business function, or department. – Add LPARs from one or more servers.

• Add LPARs from one or more servers. – Default groups (showing all partitions or all objects). © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-27. Flexibility: Custom groups

AN113.0

Notes: Groups are comprised of logical collections of objects. You can report status on a group basis, allowing you to monitor your system in a way that you prefer. You can also nest groups (a group contained within a group) to provide hierarchical or topology views. One or more user-defined groups might already be defined on your HMC. There are default groups listed under the Custom Groups node under Server Management. The default groups are All Partitions and All Objects. You can create others, delete the ones that were created, add to created groups, or delete from created groups by using the Manage Custom Groups task.

3-34 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Status Overview IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-28. Status Overview

AN113.0

Notes: When you click the Status Overview icon, it displays a highly visible and detailed summary of system status in the Work pane, as shown in the figure. It displays details about any errors (objects with unacceptable state), attention LEDs active, or open serviceable events found for the HMC or managed objects. It also summarizes the total number of errors, attention LEDs, and open serviceable events by object type. Object types include the server, partition, frames, and the HMC. When any of these conditions are present, links are available to drill down and display all objects with the particular state in the Work pane.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-35

Student Notebook

SRC lookup IBM Power Systems

• This is the ability to look up the eight-digit reference codes (SRCs). • The majority of codes are listed in the initial release. – Later, many four-digit codes are converted to eight digits.

CA00E1F6 Determine boot device sequence

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-29. SRC lookup

AN113.0

Notes: You can now look up SRC codes from the HMC as shown in the visual.

3-36 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

HMC Management: Overview IBM Power Systems

HMC network configuration

HMC operations HMC administration

HMC users management © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-30. HMC Management: Overview

AN113.0

Notes: HMC Management contains a categorized or alphabetical view of Hardware Management Console management tasks and their descriptions. These tasks are used for setting up the Hardware Management Console, maintaining its internal code, and securing the Hardware Management Console. To display the tasks in the Work pane: • Select the HMC Management node in the Navigation pane. • From the Work pane, click the task you want to perform. • By default, a categorized listing of the tasks displays. The categories include: - Operations - Administration • If you want to see what level of the HMC you are currently working with, move your mouse over HMC Version found at the top of the Work pane. • If you want an alphabetical listing of the tasks, click Alphabetical List in the upper right corner of the Work pane. Click Categorized List to go back to the task categories.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-37

Student Notebook

Systems Management IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-31. Systems Management

AN113.0

Notes: Systems Management is used to manage servers, partition, and work groups.

3-38 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

System Plans IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-32. System Plans

AN113.0

Notes: In this area, you can create, import, and manage system plans.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-39

Student Notebook

Service Management IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-33. Service Management

AN113.0

Notes: This area provides tools and applications used by the servicer.

3-40 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Updates IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-34. Updates

AN113.0

Notes: The figure shows the HMC Updates node on the navigation area. When selecting this task, it will display its content in the content area as a portal for HMC and managed system code and Firmware updates.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-41

Student Notebook

User settings IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-35. User settings

AN113.0

Notes: When you click the user name in the upper right of the HMC main screen, the User Interface Settings screen displays. The options can be selected or deselected to customize the view for the user. These changes will take effect immediately and will be in effect for both a local and remote user. Selecting the option Save settings as my defaults at logoff preserves the panel options. This will also save any additional changes to customize the view in other HMC options.

3-42 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

HMC network configuration IBM Power Systems

• Needed for configuring HMC network options: – Private or open network for HMC to service processor – HMC host name – IP addresses – Domain name – DNS server IP address

Open network

– DHCP setting – Default gateway IP address

LAN to partitions and other hosts

– Additional routes – Firewall configuration

HMC

Private network LAN to service processor

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-36. HMC network configuration

AN113.0

Notes: In the next section of this unit, you will see several screens where you must supply information about your HMC and its network. This visual lists the options that you must decide whether to enable, and the information that you will need to enter. Plan ahead and document all of this information before you attempt to configure the HMC. You will need some knowledge of basic TCP/IP configuration information or help in this area. Some of the acronyms used in the visual are explained here: • Domain Name System (DNS): The HMC needs to know which DNS server to use. • Internet Protocol (IP): The HMC needs an IP address configured for one or two Ethernet interfaces. • Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP): The HMC can be configured as a DHCP server for its managed systems. Private versus open network for HMC to the service processor One of the decisions you have is whether to connect the HMC to the service processor over a private network or over an open network. A private network is one that is restricted © Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-43

Student Notebook

to HMC and service processor connections. An open network has other network hosts connected to it. The visual shows a graphic with a private network connecting the HMC to the service processor and an open network connecting the HMC to the partitions. This is a typical configuration and the easiest to configure. For more details refer to the Preinstallation configuration worksheet for the HMC session on IBM Power Systems Hardware Information Center at http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/powersys/v3r1m5/index.jsp.

3-44 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

HMC network options: Local HMC (1 of 2) IBM Power Systems

• Private (dedicated) network that connects HMCs and FSPs: DHCP client

– HMC is a DHCP server. – Managed system FSPs are DHCP clients.

• HMC-FSP connection: Direct attach – HMC: eth0 to HMC1 port on FSP. DHCP client

• Or indirect attach: – HMC: eth0 to hub/switch. – Hub/switch to HMC1 port on FSP.

DHCP client

• Suggestion: Connect first HMC as local HMC. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-37. HMC network options: Local HMC (1 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: A private network is a separate dedicated network that includes only managed systems FSP, HMCs, or both. The private Ethernet port on the HMC is usually defined as a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server. This port automatically recognizes the managed systems (defined as DHCP client) in a private network— when the process is carried out correctly. DHCP provides an automated method for the DHCP server to assign IP address to DHCP clients in a network; in this case, the HMC is intended to provide DHCP addresses to managed systems and any other attached HMCs that are configured as DHCP clients. Local HMC: A desktop or a rack-installed HMC is directly or through a switch connected to the managed system through a private network. The HMC in your private network has, usually, one of its Ethernet ports configured as the DHCP server for your private network. The managed system by default has its Ethernet ports configured as DHCP clients.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-45

Student Notebook

Note A second Ethernet port of HMC can be configured to connect to an open network as a static IP address or a DHCP client. Any additional HMCs in your private network are usually configured as DHCP clients.

Cabling Option-1: Connect one of the Ethernet ports on the HMC directly to one of the service processor (HMC) ports on the managed system (diagram on the left). Cabling Option-2: Connect one of the Ethernet ports on the HMC to a hub (private), which also has the managed systems connected to it through the service processor (HMC) ports (diagram on the right).

3-46 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

HMC network options: Local HMC (2 of 2) IBM Power Systems

• Open network interface – HMC eth1 has static IP address or could be DHCP client. DHCP client

Open network

DHCP client Open network

DHCP client

Static IP

• The HMC interface (eth0) is on a private network while interface (eth1) is on an open network. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-38. HMC network options: Local HMC (2 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: Local HMC: A desktop or a rack-installed HMC is directly connected to the managed system through a private network. The HMC in your private network has one of its Ethernet ports configured as the DHCP server for your private network. The managed system by defaults has its Ethernet ports configured as DHCP clients. Note A second Ethernet port of HMC can be configured to connect to an open network as a DHCP client (or with a static address). Any additional HMCs in your private network are usually configured as DHCP clients.

Cabling Option-1: Connect one of the Ethernet ports on the HMC directly to one of the service processor (HMC) ports on the managed system (diagram on the left). The second Ethernet port on the HMC, however, is intended to communicate to the intranet or Internet

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-47

Student Notebook

and is thus configured as open using either a static IP address or as a DHCP client. As a client it will pick up its IP address from the network DHCP server. Cabling Option-2: Connect one of the Ethernet ports on the HMC to a hub (private), which also has the managed systems connected to it through the service processor (HMC) ports (diagram on the right). The second Ethernet port on the HMC, however, is intended to communicate to the intranet or Internet and is thus configured as open using either a static IP address or as a DHCP client. As a client, it will pick up its IP address from the network DHCP server.

3-48 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

FSP network options IBM Power Systems

• Direct Ethernet cable from HMC eth0 to HMC1 or HMC2 port on the flexible service processor (FSP). – Cable can be a standard Ethernet cable or crossover cable.

• Configure DHCP services on the HMC or use assigned static IP addresses. – Using static IP addresses requires configuration setup on FSP using ASMI.

• FSP default configuration is DHCP client; however, each port has a predefined default IP address. – POWER 5 default FSP addresses: • FSP-A • FSP-B

192.168.2.147 for HMC1 port 192.168.2.146 for HMC1 port

192.168.3.147 for HMC2 port 192.168.3.146 for HMC2 port HMC to FSP is SSL encrypted.

POWER6 and POWER7 default FSP addresses Card type/position

HMC1 default IP

HMC2 default IP

CEC FSP - position A

169.254.2.147

169.254.3.147

CEC FSP - position B

169.254.2.146

169.254.3.146

HMC to a single server with a single service processor can be as simple as a straight Ethernet cable. No external switch is required.

DHCP mandatory due to internal requirements to 590, 595, 795 CEC BPC - Position A

169.254.2.145

169.254.3.145

CEC BPC - Position B

169.254.2.144

169.254.3.144

IO BPC - Position A

169.254.2.148

169.254.3.148

IO BPC - Position A

169.254.2.149

169.254.3.149 © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-39. FSP network options

AN113.0

Notes: The default TCP/IP addresses for the FSP Ethernet ports HMC1 and HMC2 differ depending on the platform they are on. The following table documents the default IP addresses of both ports for both single and redundant FSPs (if installed), based on the platform they are installed on. The FSP ports HMC1 and HMC2, in the absence of a DHCP server, will go to their default IP addresses. This is true whether they are attached to a network or not. If the network is not 169.254.2 or 169.254.3 -- and you would not expect it to be -- the port will nevertheless be set to that value until you manually change it to one that can be used on the network. Note that you should not connect HMC1 and HMC2 ports on the FSP to the same subnet. If you only have one subnet, only configure one of the ports, HMC1 or HMC2.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-49

Student Notebook

Local single HMC with redundant FSP IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-40. Local single HMC with redundant FSP

AN113.0

Notes: This visual shows an example of the network connectivity from the HMC to the flexible service processor (FSP). Dual FSP support is standard on two system unit (2 CEC) or larger Power Systems. The HMC must be attached to both FSPs using an external ethernet switch or a hub. The HMC can provide DHCP services for IP address assignment or static IP.

3-50 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Local redundant HMCs network configuration IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-41. Local redundant HMCs network configuration

AN113.0

Notes: This is an example of two HMCs managing two servers each with redundant FSPs. For installations with two HMCs, a second switch or hub must be provided to allow the alternate FSP Interface card's ports to be connected to the second HMC. This connectivity allows the HMC to manage the system through either of the redundant FSP Interface cards. In the example, HMC1 manages both servers by attaching the HMC1 port on both service processors, and HMC2 also manages both servers by attaching the HMC2 port on both service processors. Dual HMC’s must use different subnets for server management.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-51

Student Notebook

Redundant remote HMC configuration IBM Power Systems

server-A

server-B

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-42. Redundant remote HMC configuration

AN113.0

Notes: HMC1 will manage the server-A in Rochester attaching to HMC1-Port on each of the two service processors. HMC2 will manage the server-B in Dallas attaching to HMC1-Port on each of the two service processors. By using static IP addressing, either HMC3 or HMC4 located in NYC can be used to connect and manage server-A and server-B connecting to HMC2-port on each of the four service processors. Please note also that in a remote HMC configuration, a desktop or a rack-installed HMC (for example, HMC3) is used to remotely access either a managed system directly (as depicted in the visual) or indirectly through another HMC, which is directly connected to a managed system. Remote HMCs are usually present in an open network.

3-52 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Set up HMC IBM Power Systems

HMC

750 rack mounted

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-43. Set up HMC

AN113.0

Notes: Remember that the HMC is a stand-alone intelligent appliance. Therefore, it can be set up and configured at any time independent of the managed systems or the network. Unpack the HMC and connect the mouse/keyboard/monitor as shown in the visual. At this stage: • Do not connect the Ethernet port on the HMC to the Ethernet ports (HMC) of the service processor of the managed system. • Do not connect power to the managed system. However, it is no longer a big issue if the flexible service processor (FSP) has already been powered on. You would simply unplug the MS (power cord reset) and after the HMC is ready to communicate with the MS, plug it back in. Because the MS is still a DHCP client it will see the HMC and pick up its new address, from the HMC. The keyboard and mouse might be shipped as separate units with two separate cables or they might be a combined unit with a USB connector. Attach the cables to the appropriate ports at the back of the HMC. The HMC might have one or two Ethernet ports depending © Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-53

Student Notebook

on the configuration ordered. It is advisable to have two Ethernet ports to provide you with the flexibility of integrating the HMC in to your network. After the HMC has been set up, now connect an Ethernet cable from one of the ports on the HMC to a port on the service processor on the managed system. This is a private connection. Now connect power to the managed system.

3-54 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Configure HMC: Overview IBM Power Systems

• Procedure to set up a new HMC: 1. Power off managed system. 2. Power on HMC 3. Log in as hscroot (default password is abc123). 4. Use the Guided Setup Wizard (HMC) to do the following: a. Set date and time. b. Change passwords for standard users. – hscroot = abc123 c. Create additional users if necessary. d. Configure HMC network connections. e. Configure HMC to connect to service provider.

5. Reboot the HMC. 6. Check the HMC software version.

C HM

a. Upgrade if necessary. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-44. Configure HMC: Overview

AN113.0

Notes: Hardware connections Unpack and set up the HMC. If you plan to use an external modem with the HMC to dial up IBM service to transmit service errors, connect the modem and a phone line to the modem. We will discuss details of the configuration steps in the following charts. One configuration check that the Guided Setup Wizard does not do is ensure that the software version is up to date. How to check the version and upgrade the software will be covered in a later unit in this course. If this is a new HMC, you will automatically be prompted to run the Guided Setup Wizard when you power on the HMC. This will help you set up all of the critical options. You can re-run this Wizard at any time, or access the individual configuration options separately.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-55

Student Notebook

Logon panel IBM Power Systems

• User ID: hscroot • User password: abc123

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-45. Logon panel

AN113.0

Notes: The visual depicts the HMC console Logon banner. Use the following login ID=hscroot with an initial default password of abc123.

3-56 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Setup wizard IBM Power Systems

• Guided Setup Wizard can be run at any time.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-46. Setup wizard

AN113.0

Notes: This wizard helps you set up your new system and the HMC. To set up your system and HMC successfully, complete all the tasks in the order that the wizard presents them. After you complete this wizard, you can use the properties for an object to make changes.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-57

Student Notebook

Guided Setup Wizard IBM Power Systems

• The Guided Setup Wizard opens when you power on a new HMC for the first time.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-47. Guided Setup Wizard

AN113.0

Notes:

3-58 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Display prerequisites IBM Power Systems

Prerequisite is a nice overview of what you will need to complete the wizard.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-48. Display prerequisites

AN113.0

Notes: Here we see the first screen of the setup wizard. It tells you which steps you are getting ready to take. It also includes a Prerequisite button that gives you an overview of what information you will need to complete the setup.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-59

Student Notebook

Set date and time IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-49. Set date and time

AN113.0

Notes: This panel enables you to set the date, time, and time zone where the HMC is located. The HMC might be in a different time zone from, the managed systems if using an open network connection. The city is important because it might or might not adhere to daylight savings time.

3-60 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Change passwords: hscroot IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-50. Change passwords: hscroot

AN113.0

Notes: On a new HMC, you should change the default passwords for hscroot and root immediately. The default passwords for these two profiles are abc123 and passw0rd, respectively. The new passwords must be at least seven characters long. Be sure to write down the passwords and store in a safe place for later reference.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-61

Student Notebook

Change passwords: root IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-51. Change passwords: root

AN113.0

Notes: On a new HMC, you should change the default passwords for hscroot and root immediately. The default passwords for these two profiles are abc123 and passw0rd, respectively. The new passwords must be at least seven characters long. Be sure to write down the passwords and store in a safe place for later reference.

3-62 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Add HMC users IBM Power Systems

You are limited to existing roles.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-52. Add HMC users

AN113.0

Notes: You can optionally create new HMC users. Here you can type the user name and a password (this page does not provide the capability to enter a short description). Choose to add a profile with the hmcsuperadmin role as a second profile (or back door) in case the hscroot password is forgotten. You can add other profiles later. You must also select one of the task roles in the bottom part of the window. Every user must be assigned a task role which defines the types of HMC tasks that the user can perform. Later we will discuss how to tailor your own task roles. Standard task role descriptions Following are general descriptions of the default task roles. New roles can be created if the default roles do not meet your requirements.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-63

Student Notebook

Service representative (hmcservicerep) A service representative is an IBM service representative who is at your location to install or repair the machine. It is strongly recommended that you create a user named hscpe with the service representative authority for software fixes and updates from your software support personnel. Support might need to log on to your HMC using this username when analyzing a problem. Viewer (hmcviewer) A viewer can view HMC information, but cannot change any configuration information. Operator (hmcoperator) An operator is a user who is responsible for daily system operation. Tasks that an operator cannot do include adding new users and changing the definitions of task roles. Product engineer (hmcpe) A product engineer is someone who assists in support operations. The differences between the service representative task role and the product engineer task role are slight and can be viewed in the Managing Your Server document. For example, the product engineer can shut down the HMC and close virtual terminal windows, whereas the service representative cannot. Super administrator (hmcsuperadmin) The super administrator acts as the root user, or manager of the HMC system. The system administrator has unrestricted authority to access and modify most of the HMC system.

3-64 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Completion checkpoint message IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-53. Completion checkpoint message

AN113.0

Notes: This is a checkpoint message indicating the configuration steps completed so far and the remaining steps.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-65

Student Notebook

Network settings: HMC identification IBM Power Systems

Network

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-54. Network settings: HMC identification

AN113.0

Notes: This visual shows the first screen you will see of the network settings. You will also see this panel if you choose Customize Network Settings from the HMC Configuration application. Notice there are four tabs along the top. The network options configured through these screens will require a restart of the HMC for the changes to be effective. Identification tab • Console name: Specify a name unique to the network domain to be the HMC’s hostname. • Domain name: The Domain Naming System (DNS) domain name for this HMC; for example, companyname.com or company.abc.com. • Console description: Enter a description for this HMC. For example, the HMC can be described by the systems they manage or by their location.

3-66 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Network settings: LAN Adapters (1 of 4) IBM Power Systems

1 2 Network

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-55. Network settings: LAN Adapters (1 of 4)

AN113.0

Notes: LAN Adapters tab The HMC might have two (or more) Ethernet ports eth0 and eth1 depending on the configuration ordered. The MAC addresses of the two network interface cards (NICs) are shown in the LAN Adapter pane. Each Ethernet port can be configured independent of the other, and either of these Ethernet adapters can be configured to connect to the service processor of the managed system. Select one of the network interfaces and click Details. The screen that displays is shown on the next visual.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-67

Student Notebook

Network settings: LAN Adapters (2 of 4) IBM Power Systems

Network

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-56. Network settings: LAN Adapters (2 of 4)

AN113.0

Notes: The LAN Adapter Details screen has two tabs. LAN Adapter Detail and Firewall Settings Here are details about the LAN Adapter tab: Network type It is recommended that you first configure a private network (instead of an open network) for the HMC by clicking Private. A private network means that the HMC connects to the managed systems directly or over a separate network which is not shared by other network traffic. An open network refers to any general, public network that contains devices other than HMCs and managed systems. It is recommended that you implement communications (between the HMC and the Managed system) through a private network, because of the additional security and ease of setup that it provides. However, in some environments, this might not be feasible or acceptable for various reasons, including the location of the Computer Systems control center. The functionality of the HMC is the same on both types of networks. 3-68 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Partition communication check box The Partition communication check box, if selected, configures this interface for communications between an HMC and logical partitions. Select this box for an interface that connects to partitions. This check box should remain cleared for the initial HMC port configuration required to connect to the service processor of the managed system, because no partitions have been created. Media speed The default of automatic detection for the Ethernet adapter media speed is recommended for the initial setup. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server If you click the Private network button, you should configure this HMC as a DHCP server. The client in this case will be the service processor on the managed system that this HMC is managing. The DHCP clients are automatically assigned their own IP address and configuration parameters from the DHCP server. In a private network, configure your first or only HMC as a DHCP server. If you click the Open network button, the Enable DHCP server option is grayed out and not available for selection. Address range A DHCP server has a range of IP addresses that it assigns to client systems. If you configure the HMC as a DHCP server, select one of the following standard nonroutable IP address ranges for your private network. Consult your network administrator before you select a range. An example of these ranges is shown in the visual. If you decide to connect your private network to an open network later, using standard nonroutable IP addresses will allow your DHCP servers to co-exist. The DHCP server in the HMC uses automatic allocation, which means that each unique service processor Ethernet interface will be reassigned exactly the same IP address each time it is started. Each Ethernet interface has a unique identifier based upon a built-in media access control (MAC) address, which allows the DHCP server to reassign the same IP parameters. DHCP client/IP address This HMC port has been selected to be private. Because Private was selected, DHCP can also be selected. DHCP automatically assigns an address compatible with the range of addresses selected through the DHCP client/IP address list.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-69

Student Notebook

Network settings: LAN Adapters (3 of 4) IBM Power Systems

Select the interface and click Details.

Network

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-57. Network settings: LAN Adapters (3 of 4)

AN113.0

Notes: This chart represents the configuration of the second Ethernet port of the HMC for connection over an open network, where the first Ethernet port of the HMC was configured to connect the HMC to the managed system over a private network.

3-70 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Network settings: LAN Adapters (4 of 4) IBM Power Systems

The network DHCP server supplies the IP address.

Or you can specify the IP address.

Network

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-58. Network settings: LAN Adapters (4 of 4)

AN113.0

Notes: The LAN Adapter Details screen has two tabs: LAN Adapter Detail and Firewall Settings. Network type Configure the second Ethernet port in an open network, by clicking Open. An open network refers to any general, public network that contains devices other than HMCs and managed systems. Media speed The default of automatic detection for the Ethernet adapter media speed is recommended for the initial setup. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server When you click the Open network button, the Enable DHCP server option is grayed out and not available for selection.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-71

Student Notebook

DHCP client/IP address In the last part of the LAN Adapter tab, you can choose whether this HMC will be a DHCP client through the LAN adapter. The TCP/IP address for the DHCP client can be obtained from the DHCP Server on the open network, or you can supply this information. Refer to the chart filled out earlier for this information.

3-72 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Network settings: LAN firewall IBM Power Systems

Network

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-59. Network settings: LAN firewall

AN113.0

Notes: LAN Adapter Details (Firewall tab) A firewall configuration would not be required when the Private network option is selected, because the private network has only the HMC and its associated managed systems. In an open network, a firewall usually controls outside access to your company network. The firewall support on each of the HMC Ethernet adapters allows you to control access to the HMC, based on IP addresses and user applications. Consider configuring the firewall on HMC ports connecting to an open network. If you want to control the HMC remotely or give remote access to others when the HMC is on a open network, modify the firewall settings of the HMC Ethernet adapter that is connected to your open network. (Check if you need to access the HMC through WebSM or Secure Shell.) To allow access, first select the IP addresses you want to allow through your firewall. You can allow any IP address using a particular application, or specific IP addresses, through the firewall. For maximum security, remove all applications.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-73

Student Notebook

Allow specific applications from any IP address To allow any IP address using a particular application through the firewall: 1. In the top box, highlight the application. 2. Click Allow Incoming. The application displays in the bottom box to signify that it has been configured. Allow specific applications from a specific IP address To allow applications from specific IP addresses through the firewall: 1. In the top box, highlight an application. 2. Click Allow Incoming by IP Address. 3. On the Hosts Allowed panel, enter the client’s IP address and network mask. 4. Click Add and OK. Get help from your network administrator to ensure that your configuration conforms to your network security requirements.

3-74 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Network settings: Name Services IBM Power Systems

Network

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-60. Network settings: Name Services

AN113.0

Notes: Name Services configuration This tab configures the Domain Name Services (DNS) settings for the HMC. Name services provide IP to host name (and vice versa) mappings. Again, refer to the earlier chart for information gathered from your network administrator to enter. DNS enabled check box If the network where the HMC resides uses DNS services, select the DNS enabled check box. This configures the HMC as a DNS client. DNS Server Search Order Enter the DNS server search order. You can list DNS servers in the order that they will be checked. As specified by the DNS protocol, the successive servers are only used if the preceding servers are not available. Domain Suffix Search Order In the lower pane of the screen, enter the domain suffix search order for your network. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-75

Student Notebook

Network settings: Routing IBM Power Systems

Network

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-61. Network settings: Routing

AN113.0

Notes: Network routing You might have a network structure where additional network routes need to be configured. This is typical of a complex communications network. An HMC might need to be able to reach its partitions and those partitions might be on a remote network. A default gateway might be all that you need to configure as the default gateway might be able to route all IP packets to the correct network. Or, you might know of a more direct route to get to partitions than the default gateway. You can add this route on this tab. Another reason is that you might not have a complex network at all and are not using dynamic routing, in which case, a few static routes might be all that you need. Adding a route To add a route, click New in the middle of the screen. The pop-up window that opens is shown in the visual. Enter the destination network address, the gateway network address, the subnet mask in use, and choose which adapter to use. Click OK to enter the route.

3-76 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Enable routed You might want to run the dynamic routed daemon. This daemon communicates with other routed daemons to learn new, closer routes to remote networks. Default gateway information For many installations, the HMC simply needs to know the IP address of a gateway system. The HMC then relies on this gateway for all routing services. Make sure that the gateway device you choose is on the same subnet as the gateway system.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-77

Student Notebook

HMC TCP/IP relationship to FSP (1 of 2) IBM Power Systems

HMC

FSP eth0

HMC1

UNCONFIGURED

Power has not been applied. eth1

HMC2

UNCONFIGURED

Intra/Internet

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-62. HMC TCP/IP relationship to FSP (1 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: HMC Here we can see what we are trying to accomplish by configuring the Ethernet ports on the HMC. When the HMC is delivered none of its Ethernet ports are configured, as such it cannot talk to a MS. At least one of its ports must be configured in order for the two systems to be able to communicate. You could configure one of its ports as private and to be a DHCP server – it is only intended to supply IP addresses to Managed systems and possibly other HMCs. As a DHCP server you select a range of addresses (nonroutable) that it will supply to its clients. The HMC will then provide an address for its own port that is compatible with all the addresses within the selected range. You can then configure the other HMC port to be open, in which case it can either be a DHCP client (getting its IP address from the network DHCP server) or hard code its IP address. Its purpose is to be able to provide remote access to the HMC.

3-78 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Managed system Both Ethernet ports on the managed system (labeled HMC1 and HMC2) are by default DHCP clients. When the managed system is plugged in, it does a two-stage boot. In the first stage, it is expecting to find a DHCP server (hopefully an HMC) and if it does, it will acquire its IP address and (if the server is an HMC) auto configure itself to the HMC. If it does not find a DHCP server it will come up under a ‘default’ IP address. It can communicate with an HMC using this address (if the HMC port address is compatible with this default IP address). However, it is still configured as a DHCP client and if it finds a DHCP server on its next boot, it would acquire a new IP address and no longer be able to communicate with the HMC.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-79

Student Notebook

HMC TCP/IP relationship to FSP (2 of 2) IBM Power Systems

HMC

FSP eth0

HMC1

PRIVATE DHCP SERVER Range:10.128.240.2 - 10.128.255.254 255.255.255.0 eth0 -> 10.128.240.1 OPEN FIXED IP ADDRESS eth1 -> 9.5.31.19 OR DHCP CLIENT

Power has not been applied. HMC2

eth1

Intra/Internet

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-63. HMC TCP/IP relationship to FSP (2 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: HMC Here we can see what we are trying to accomplish by configuring the Ethernet ports on the HMC. When the HMC is delivered none of its Ethernet ports are configured, as such it cannot talk to a MS. At least one of its ports must be configured in order for the two systems to be able to communicate. You could configure one of its ports as private and to be a DHCP server – it is only intended to supply IP addresses to Managed systems and possibly other HMCs. As a DHCP server you select a range of addresses (nonroutable) that it will supply to its clients. The HMC will then provide an address for its own port that is compatible with all the addresses within the selected range. You can then configure the other HMC port to be open, in which case it can either be a DHCP client (getting its IP address from the network DHCP server) or hard code its IP address. Its purpose is to be able to provide remote access to the HMC.

3-80 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Managed system Both Ethernet ports on the managed system (labeled HMC1 and HMC2) are, by default, DHCP clients. When the managed system is plugged in, it does a two-stage boot. In the first stage, it is expecting to find a DHCP server (hopefully an HMC) and if it does, it will acquire its IP address and (if the server is an HMC) auto configure itself to the HMC. If it does not find a DHCP server is will come up under a ‘default’ IP address. It can communicate with an HMC using this address (if the HMC port address is compatible with this default IP address). However, it is still configured as a DHCP client and if it finds a DHCP server on its next boot, it would acquire a new IP address and no longer be able to communicate with the HMC.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-81

Student Notebook

Completion checkpoint message IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-64. Completion checkpoint message

AN113.0

Notes: This is a second checkpoint message that indicates that you have completed the Network Setting and shows the additional remaining setup steps. The information in the next few screens are not critical for making a successful connection to the managed system; however, they are important for the effective management and service support of your HMC.

3-82 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Contact information IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-65. Contact information

AN113.0

Notes: These panels provide the contact information, such as: Contact Person, HMC Administrator, and physical location of the HMC.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-83

Student Notebook

Email notification IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-66. Email notification

AN113.0

Notes: You can add the email address that will be notified when problems occur on you system.

3-84 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Configuration completion IBM Power Systems

• Click Finish. • Reboot the HMC!

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-67. Configuration completion

AN113.0

Notes: Reboot HMC After the HMC configuration is complete, you will need to reboot the HMC. Click Console > Exit, and you will see options to log out, shut down, or reboot the HMC. Select the reboot option on the list. This will cause the HMC to power down and restart. The HMC logon panel will be displayed. When you log on, the HMC Application GUI will be displayed.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-85

Student Notebook

Reboot IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-68. Reboot

AN113.0

Notes: To reboot the HMC, select HMC Management and then click Shut Down or Restart from the list.

3-86 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

After reboot IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-69. After reboot

AN113.0

Notes: When the HMC completes the boot process, the pre-logon screen will display. Now you can log on with the new user ID and passwords created with the wizard.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-87

Student Notebook

First connection to a managed system IBM Power Systems

Click Pending.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-70. First connection to a managed system

AN113.0

Notes: Click Pending Authentication to set up the HMC access password that the HMC will use to talk to the FSP. (this is not the hscroot password). Also, you can set up the passwords for both the admin and general ASMI user passwords. Do not forget these passwords!

3-88 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

HMC TCP/IP relationship to FSP (1 of 2) IBM Power Systems

HMC

FSP

Power System auto configured

PRIVATE eth0 -> 10.128.240.1 DHCP SERVER 10.128.240.2 – 10.128.255.254 255.255.255.0

eth0

without DHCP server 192.168.2.147 (Power5) 169.254.2.147 (Power6/7) 255.255.255.0

HMC1

eth1

without DHCP server 192.168.3.147 (Power5) 169.254.3.147 (Power6/7) 255.255.255.0

HMC2

OPEN Eth1-> 9.5.31.19 FIXED IP ADDRESS OR DHCP CLIENT

No power

Intra/Internet

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-71. HMC TCP/IP relationship to FSP (1 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: This is how the ports should look before configuration has been done and power applied to the managed system.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-89

Student Notebook

HMC TCP/IP relationship to FSP (2 of 2) IBM Power Systems

HMC

FSP

Power System auto configured

PRIVATE eth0 -> 10.128.240.1 DHCP SERVER 10.128.240.2 – 10.128.255.254 255.255.255.0

eth0

HMC1

eth 1

DHCP CLIENT 10.128.255.254 255.255.255.0

HMC2

DHCP CLIENT 192.168.3.147 (Power5) 169.254.3.147 (Power6/7) 255.255.255.0

OPEN Eth1-> 9.5.31.19 FIXED IP ADDRESS OR DHCP CLIENT

Apply power

Intra/Internet

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-72. HMC TCP/IP relationship to FSP (2 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: This is how it should look after the HMC has been configured, rebooted, and cabled to the managed system and then power applied to the managed system.

3-90 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Success IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-73. Success

AN113.0

Notes: After setting the service processor profiles, it should show a state of Powered Off.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-91

Student Notebook

Local versus remote HMC IBM Power Systems

Actual/local HMC

Remote HMC

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-74. Local versus remote HMC

AN113.0

Notes: You can see the difference in HMC web UI between local HMC access as opposed to a remote web access. • Locking the HMC screen: To lock the HMC screen, open the Lock HMC Screen task from the HMC Management work pane. The HMC screen is locked immediately. To unlock the screen and return to the HMC workplace, press Enter and specify the password for the user ID for which you are logged in. • Open Restricted Shell Terminal: Use this task to acquire a command line session. To open a restricted shell terminal, open the Open Restricted Shell Terminal task from the HMC Management work pane. The Restricted Shell window displays. From the Restricted Shell window, you can issue commands remotely through secure shell access to the managed system. This provides consistent results and automates administration of managed systems. • Launch Remote HMC: You can use this task to start a session to another HMC.

3-92 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

View HMC Events IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-75. View HMC Events

AN113.0

Notes: This task shows the console event logs on the HMC. The HMC keeps a log of significant operations and activities automatically, referred to as console events that occur while the application is running. Thus, system events are individual activities that indicate when processes occur, begin and end, and succeed or fail.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-93

Student Notebook

Shut Down or Restart IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-76. Shut Down or Restart

AN113.0

Notes: This task enables you to shut down (turn off the console) or to restart the console.

3-94 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Schedule Operations IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-77. Schedule Operations

AN113.0

Notes: This task creates a defined schedule for certain tasks, such as activating a system or partition using a specific profile, backing up Profile Data, or turning on or off a managed system without operator assistance.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-95

Student Notebook

Change Network Settings IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-78. Change Network Settings

AN113.0

Notes: This task allows you to configure, update, and change the Ethernet settings for the adapters cards installed in the HMC.

3-96 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Test Network Connectivity IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-79. Test Network Connectivity

AN113.0

Notes: You can see information concerning the networking configuration on the HMC. There are tabs on this window (Ping, Interfaces, Address, Routes, Address Resolution Protocol (ARP), Sockets, Transmission Control Protocol (TCP), User Datagram Protocol (UDP), and Internet Protocol (IP)) to scroll through for information. This task also allows you to send a ping to a remote host.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-97

Student Notebook

Change User Interface Settings IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-80. Change User Interface Settings

AN113.0

Notes: There are two options here, one for the default for all user interface settings and one for the currently signed on user. The options that you can select or clear are the same. The HMC user interface is made up of several major components: the banner, the navigation pane, the work pane, the task bar, the status bar, and the tasks pad. This task enables you to customize settings that control how the HMC interface displays, including specific areas, such as the user interface components and nodes that display in the navigation pane as shown in the visual.

3-98 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Change Date and Time IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-81. Change Date and Time

AN113.0

Notes: This task enables you to change the time and date of the battery operated HMC clock and to add or remove time servers for the Network Time Protocol (NTP) service as shown in the visual. The battery operated clock keeps the time and date for the HMC.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-99

Student Notebook

Launch Guided Setup Wizard IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-82. Launch Guided Setup Wizard

AN113.0

Notes: This is another way to start the wizard. It can be run at anytime. If you do not want to change a setting, click Next; the wizard will keep the old setting.

3-100 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Welcome text IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-83. Welcome text

AN113.0

Notes: The visual above shows the HMC Welcome Text input panel. Use the interface to display a message to your users when they try to login to the HMC, Messages of the day for example or HMC availability and maintenance schedules.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-101

Student Notebook

Add Managed Systems (1 of 3) IBM Power Systems

• Add the managed system to the Server Management application. • The managed system must be on the same network as HMC.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-84. Add Managed System (1 of 3)

AN113.0

Notes: If the HMC is on a private network with the service processor, then the HMC should find the service processor automatically, and add it to the Server Management application. If the HMC and service processor are on a network with other systems, or if the service processor is using static IP addresses, then you must use the Add Managed System task from the HMC Management Work pane to add the managed system to the list of Servers of the Systems Management pane. If this is a new managed system, and there is no DHCP server available, the default service processor IP address will be 192.168.2.147 or 169.254.2.147 depending on your system type for the first Ethernet port on the service processor card and 192.168.3.147 or 169.254.3.147 for the second Ethernet port.

3-102 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Add Managed Systems (2 of 3) IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-85. Add Managed System (2 of 3)

AN113.0

Notes: If you know the IP address of the managed system and the HMC access password, then you can use the first option on this screen, Add a managed system and type the IP address in the IP Address/Host name field. The password you enter is the HMC access password, which must have already been set during a previous HMC to service processor setup. If you do not know the IP address, or the HMC access password has not been set up, then type the range of IP addresses that it could be as shown in the example in the visual. The range of addresses cannot exceed 256 total addresses. The next visual shows what happens when this operation finds the managed system. If you need to set or see the IP address of the service processor, you can connect a terminal to the serial port of the service processor to access ASMI. This interface can be used to configure the IP address that will be used by the service processor. You can then connect the service processor to the network, and enter the IP address in the Find managed systems option. This procedure is particularly useful if the service processor is connected to an open network. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-103

Student Notebook

Add Managed Systems (3 of 3) IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-86. Add Managed System (3 of 3)

AN113.0

Notes: The visual shows the result of the find operation specified on the last visual. Select the managed system and click Next to add this managed system to the HMC Systems Management pane.

3-104 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Managing the server or HMC connection IBM Power Systems

• Menu options to: – – – –

Reset or remove connection Disconnect another HMC Add a managed system Check service processor status

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-87. Managing the server or HMC connection

AN113.0

Notes: The visual points out some other important tasks that you might need to do to manage the communications between the HMC and its managed systems. Reset or remove a connection We have already seen that Add Managed System task on the HMC Management Work pane is how you can seek managed systems on the network and add them to the HMC Systems Management. The visual shows an example where a second management system was added to the System Management. The opposite to Add Managed System is Reset or Remove Connection. This will allow you to reset or remove a managed system from the Systems Management. If you choose this menu option, another window will open asking if you want to reset or remove the managed system. If you choose remove it, the managed system disappears from the Systems Management. Choosing to reset the managed system will disconnect then reconnect the managed system.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-105

Student Notebook

If you suspect a problem with the managed system connection to the HMC, you can perform a reset. If there is no connection between the managed system and the HMC, try a reset to see if it fixes the issue. If a reset does not help, investigate the physical connection between the HMC and the managed system and the network configurations. Update managed system password You can use the Change Password task to change the managed system's HMC access password. This is the one used for communications between the HMC and the managed systems service processors. If you change this password, you must change the password for any other HMCs that connect to this managed system.

3-106 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Check managed system status IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-88. Check managed system status

AN113.0

Notes: Connection status The Status menu option displays information about the status of the HMC connection to the bulk power assemblies on the frame or to the service processors on the managed system. You must select the managed system name first before accessing this option. If you are viewing the connection status for a frame, you can see the state of the connection from the HMC to side A and side B of the bulk power assembly. The HMC will operate normally with a connection to either side A or side B. However, for code update operations and some concurrent maintenance operations, the HMC needs connections to both sides. If you are viewing the connection status for a managed system, you can see the state of the connection from the HMC to the primary and secondary service processors. The HMC will operate normally with a connection to only the primary service processor. However, for code update operations and some concurrent maintenance operations on the managed system, the HMC needs connections to both the primary and secondary service

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-107

Student Notebook

processors. If no secondary service processor is installed, only one connection to the primary service processor is required.

3-108 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Check HMC software version IBM Power Systems

• Check in HMC management – HMC version

• Or, check from HMC command line: lshmc -V "version= Version: 7 Release: 7.3.0 Service Pack: 1 HMC Build level 20110920.1 MH01281: Fix for HMC V7R7.3.0 SP1 (09-21-2011) ","base_version=V7R7.1.0 " © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-89. Check HMC software version

AN113.0

Notes: Another step in the configuration and maintenance of your HMC is to ensure that its software is kept up to date. Check the HMC technical support website to make sure there are no additional fixes for the HMC. The visual shows two places where the HMC software version can be checked. Notice that when you use the lshmc -V command from the command line, the fix packs that have been loaded are displayed. The procedure for loading fixes will be covered later in this course. Check against website for latest version and fixes: http://www14.software.ibm.com/webapp/set2/sas/f/hmc/home.html

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-109

Student Notebook

Topic 1: Checkpoint IBM Power Systems

1. Which of the following are functions of the HMC? a. Monitor TCP/IP network objects b. Capacity on demand activation c. Partition configuration d. Activate partitions

2. When might an HMC need to be configured as a DHCP server? 3. How is the HMC connected to its managed system? 4. True or False: One HMC can manage multiple managed systems. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-90. Topic 1: Checkpoint

AN113.0

Notes:

3-110 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

3.2. HMC users, remote access, and security

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-111

Student Notebook

Topic 2: HMC users, remote access, and security IBM Power Systems

After completing this topic, you should be able to: • Create HMC users • Configure and assign task roles and managed resource roles • Configure HMC remote access options • Enable and disable remote virtual console support • Log in to the HMC command line and use HMC commands • Describe security options, such as: – Controlling remote connection, virtual consoles, and SSH access – Managing certificates from the HMC

• Overview of Integrated Virtualization Manager (IVM): The HMC alternative

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-91. Topic 2: HMC users, remote access, and security

AN113.0

Notes:

3-112 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

HMC user management IBM Power Systems

• HMC users and roles are specific to that HMC. • Passwords must be at least seven characters. – Password expiration • Roles are configurable by task and by resource.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-92. HMC user management

AN113.0

Notes: Under the HMC Management Work pane, a task is available for creating, managing custom user accounts. As stated earlier in this unit, these HMC users are unique on this HMC. The first task in the visual, Change User Password, allows you to change the password for the account that you used to log in to the current HMC session. If you are logged in as a different account than hscroot, you might find the options Manage User Profiles and Access and Manage Tasks and Resource Roles unavailable and only the Change User Password option available for you to change your own password. The second task shown in the visual is Manage User Profiles and Access. This is where you create new users, and modify other aspects of a user account. The third task is Manage Task and Resource Roles. A task is a specific procedure that a user might do, such as activate a partition, or create a user. A managed resource is a thing that a user might perform a procedure on, such as a managed system, or a partition. When you create a user account, you assign a task role, which has assigned to it one or more tasks, and a managed resource role, which has one or more managed resources assigned to it. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-113

Student Notebook

Change User Password IBM Power Systems

• Change current user password

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-93. Change User Password

AN113.0

Notes: This option enables you to change the current users password.

3-114 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Add or manage HMC users IBM Power Systems

• To add or manage users, choose HMC Management and then Manage User Profiles and Access. • Access the User menu to add, modify, remove, or copy a user.

List of current user accounts © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-94. Add or manage HMC users

AN113.0

Notes: To add an account, use the User > Add menu option. To change an account, use the User > Modify option. To change the account’s password, use the User > Modify menu option. The hscpe user This user is created with the Service Representative authority for software fixes and updates from your software support personnel. Support might need to log on to your HMC using this username when analyzing a problem. Generally, this user is created after the installation and setup of the HMC.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-115

Student Notebook

Add an HMC user (1 of 2) IBM Power Systems

Password cannot be less than seven characters.

Select type of authentication

• Select Managed Resource Roles and one task role. • Custom roles appear in these lists.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-95. Add an HMC user (1 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: Adding a user This visual shows what happens when you click User > Add from the menu shown on the previous visual. From here, you can type in the user name, a password, and a short description. You must also select one of the task roles and at least one resource role to assign to the user account. The resource roles define which resources (such as which partitions) that a user can perform tasks on, and task roles define the groups of tasks that the user can perform. By default, there is only one resource role that includes all of the resources. More than one Managed Resource Role can be selected but only one Task Role can be selected. The default task roles are listed as follows. Also, you need to select the type authentication between local authentication, LDAP authentication, or Kerberos authentication.

3-116 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Modifying a user If you were modifying a user rather than adding a new user, this screen would show you the current settings for this user by highlighting the task role and the managed resource roles assigned to the user. Task role descriptions Following is a general description of the default task roles. New roles can be created if the default roles do not meet your requirements. A user can have only one task role. Service representative (hmcservicerep) A Service representative is an IBM service representative who is at your location to install or repair the machine. Viewer (hmcviewer) A viewer can view HMC information, but cannot change any configuration information. Operator (hmcoperator) An operator is a user who is responsible for daily system operations. Tasks that an operator cannot do include adding new users and changing the definitions of task roles. Product engineer (hmcpe) A product engineer is someone who assists in support operations. The differences between the service representative task role and the product engineer task role are slight. For example, the product engineer can shut down the HMC and close virtual terminal windows, whereas the service representative cannot. Super administrator (hmcsuperadmin) The super administrator acts as the root user, or manager of the HMC system. The super administrator has unrestricted authority to access and modify most of the HMC system. The hscroot login account is set to have the hmcsuperadmin task role. Default task roles definitions To find out exactly what the default task roles are allowed to do, copy one of the task roles and then modify the copy. In this way, you can list out the exact operations that a user with this task role can perform. You must first make a copy because you cannot modify a default task role. You can then delete the copy. The default task role operations are also listed in the Information Center. Do a search for HMC tasks to find this information.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-117

Student Notebook

Authentication methods Users who remotely authenticate through Kerberos or LDAP must have their profiles set appropriately. You must set the user profile of each remotely authenticated Kerberos or LDAP user to use that type of authentication instead of local authentication. A user that is set to use Kerberos or LDAP remote authentication will always use that type of authentication, even when the user logs in to the HMC locally. The use of Kerberos authentication requires configuration of a KDC server using the KDC Configuration task. Use of LDAP authentication requires configuration of an LDAP server using the LDAP Configuration task. You do not need to set all users to use Kerberos or LDAP remote authentication. If you select Local Authentication, type a password and a password confirmation in the field provided. If you select Kerberos Authentication, type a Kerberos remote user ID. If you select LDAP Authentication, no additional information is required.

3-118 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Add an HMC user (2 of 2) IBM Power Systems

Specify timeout values if needed.

Select Allow remote access or you will get the following message:

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-96. Add an HMC user (2 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: When you click User Properties from the previous visual, you reach this window where you can specify special properties for the user you are managing. If you want to enable remote web server access for the user you are managing, select Allow remote access via the web or you will encounter the message Remote Access is Prohibited when trying a remote login using this user.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-119

Student Notebook

HMC users: Resources and task roles example IBM Power Systems

Resource role: Selected resources

Add user ID with selected roles Select the resource role

Task role: Selected tasks

Select the Task role

User sees only the selected LPARs and selected tasks for those LPARs. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-97. HMC users: Resources and task roles example

AN113.0

Notes: HMC version 7 offers improved Task, Resource, and User assignment configuration. HMC version 7 can be configured so that users see only LPARs and Tasks that have been allocated to them.

3-120 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Task roles management IBM Power Systems

• Task roles define what tasks an account can perform. – One role is assigned to each user account when the user account is created.

• Add new task roles to create custom task roles. – You can use the copy feature to copy a role and then alter it. – From the HMC Management work pane, click Manage Task and Resource Roles.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-98. Task roles management

AN113.0

Notes: Each HMC user account must be assigned a task role when it is created. Each of these roles allows the user to access different parts of the HMC or perform tasks on different partitions. You might want to add new user roles or to customize existing user-created roles. If you do, remember that the changes occur only on the HMC where you did the customization. If you want to customize the default roles, you will need to copy them first, and then perform the customization on the copy.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-121

Student Notebook

Add task role example IBM Power Systems

Then create an HMC user and associate with it this task role: DLPAROperator.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-99. Add task role example

AN113.0

Notes: The visual shows how to add a new custom task role. After clicking Add from the menu, the Add Role window opens. Select one or more tasks in the web User interface permission menu from left side window and click Add to add them to the right side window, which is what will be configured for this task role. Users created with task roles that only allow them to do certain tasks will have only those tasks presented to them in the menus when they are logged in. For example, if the user is not allowed to shut down a partition, then that option does not display on the HMC menus.

3-122 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Managed resource roles management IBM Power Systems

• Managed resource roles define the resources on which a user can perform a task: – For example, a user might only be allowed to perform tasks on a particular managed system or partition. – Unlike tasks roles, more than one managed resource role can be associated with a user.

• Add new managed resource roles to create custom roles: – You can use the copy feature to copy a role, and then alter. – From HMC Management work pane, click Manage Task and Resource Roles.

Example custom role

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-100. Managed resource roles management

AN113.0

Notes: In the visual the Managed Resource Roles option has been selected; so the list of current managed resource roles is listed. A managed resource is a resource on which an action can be performed, such as a partition or a managed system. You can create a managed resource role with multiple resources, and then add just one named managed resource role to a user, or you can create separate, specific managed resource roles, such as one per partition and managed system. One HMC can be connected to several managed systems. You might want to create users that can only perform operations on one or more managed systems. You will need to create managed resource roles for the managed systems to accomplish this.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-123

Student Notebook

Add managed resource role example IBM Power Systems

Select a managed system and then a logical partition.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-101. Add managed resource role example

AN113.0

Notes: Users created with managed resource roles that only allow them to have access to certain resources will only have those resources available to them when they are logged in. The procedure for creating a managed resource role is similar to a task role. Click Add on the Customize User Controls menu, type a new name, choose available objects from the window on the left, then click Add to add them to the list of current objects for this managed resource role.

3-124 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Copy User IBM Power Systems

• • • •

Select the user. Select Copy. Type a name. Click OK. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-102. Copy User

AN113.0

Notes: A quick way to create another user is to do the copy function. Notice that you can also make changes to the new ID.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-125

Student Notebook

HMC remote access options IBM Power Systems

• Web user interface • Command line interface (CLI) SSH access to HMC commands

HMC

Network

Web browser © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-103. HMC remote access options

AN113.0

Notes: Web browser requirements HMC web browser support requires HTML 2.0, JavaScript 1.0, Java virtual machine (JVM), and cookie support in browsers that will connect to the HMC. SSH connection You can use a Secure Shell (SSH) connection directly to the HMC. When you log in, you are given a restricted shell. Most partition management commands can be executed using this restricted shell command line. There are also a limited number of Linux commands available. Use the shell command echo $PATH after you log in to see which directories are available. A listing of these directories will show the commands available. To see usage information, run the commands with the --help option. Make sure the remote command line interface access to the HMC is enabled.

3-126 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Remote CLI access: Secure shell IBM Power Systems

• Install SSH client on workstation. – One example is PuTTY (freeware). – Enter HMC host name or IP address. – Sign on to HMC. • HMC user profile/password

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-104. Remote CLI access: Secure Shell

AN113.0

Notes: PuTTY is a free implementation of Telnet and SSH for Windows and Unix platforms, along with an xterm terminal emulator. Your can obtain more information about PuTTY at http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-127

Student Notebook

Remote web access IBM Power Systems

• Launches as a separate window.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-105. Remote web access

AN113.0

Notes: The remote client is launched as a separate window. Make sure that browser is configured to allow pop-ups; otherwise, you will not be able to launch the remote client.

3-128 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Browser settings: Firefox IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-106. Browser settings: Firefox

AN113.0

Notes: Under the Tools – Options window, you can add the exception for pop-ups for your HMC. You do this by adding the IP address or host name in the Address of Website field and clicking Allow. To enable the JavaScript option to raise and lower windows, click the Advance tab on the Options window and check the Raise or lower windows check box. Then click OK. Also note that one can uncheck the Block pop-up windows box as well.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-129

Student Notebook

Browser settings: Internet Explorer IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-107. Browser settings: Internet Explorer

AN113.0

Notes: Internet Explorer has a similar set of options that will need to be verified for remote HMC operations.

3-130 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

HMC firewall settings IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-108. HMC firewall settings

AN113.0

Notes: Firewall settings for the HMC adapter must be enabled for the remote HMC to work. Port 443 is enabled to allow remote browser access, port 22 enabled allows remote secure shell.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-131

Student Notebook

Remote logon IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-109. Remote logon

AN113.0

Notes: This visual provides a view of the HMC remote web UI login link. It also gives you a brief color coded status of the managed system.

3-132 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Enabling remote browser access IBM Power Systems

• Needs to be enabled using the local/physical HMC interface. • HMC firewall – port 443 enabled (secure remote web access).

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-110. Enabling remote browser access

AN113.0

Notes: Enable the HMC remote access Open the Remote Operation task from the HMC Management Work pane. Select Enabled from the Remote Operation drop-down list and then click OK. The HMC can be accessed from a remote workstation using a web browser. All remote browser access the HMC must use Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) encryption.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-133

Student Notebook

Enable or disable remote options IBM Power Systems

• SSH to the HMC to perform management tasks remotely: – HMC Management > Remote Command Execution – Must also open the HMC firewall for SSH access.

• Remote access to LPAR virtual terminals (consoles): – HMC Management > Remote Virtual Terminal © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-111. Enable or disable remote options

AN113.0

Notes: Enabling remote HMC commands (SSH) Recall that the remote HMC commands allow you to perform many partition management operations from a remote command line. From this secure shell, you can execute remote HMC commands to do things like activate a partition or query its status. By default, the HMC does not allow SSH sessions so you must enable this function using the Remote Command Execution task from the HMC Management work pane. Select the check box labeled Enable remote command execution using the ssh facility in the Remote Command Execution window. Enabling remote virtual terminals Another remote option available from the HMC Management Work pane is a tool that allows you to enable or disable the ability to use remote virtual terminal windows to the partitions (that is, remote console windows). Simply click the Remote Virtual Terminal task in the work area and select the Enable remote virtual terminal connections.

3-134 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Using remote HMC commands (1 of 2) IBM Power Systems

• Install SSH (if necessary) on client. • There are multiple ways to run commands using SSH. – Single HMC command (you will be prompted for password): $ ssh -l hscroot hmc hmccommand

– Alternative single HMC command syntax: $ ssh hscroot@hmc hmccommand

– Log in to the HMC and execute commands in a shell: $ ssh -l hscroot hmchost hscroot@hmc's password: Last login: Thu May

5 12:03:12 2008 from console

hscroot@hmc> date Tue Mar

6 15:45:22 CET 2012

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-112. Using remote HMC commands (1 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: HMC command line options The visual shows how to use SSH from a remote command line, such as a Linux or AIX shell. To run HMC commands remotely, you can either send one command to the HMC as shown in the first example, or log in to the restricted shell using SSH and run any number of commands. Exit out of the SSH shell when you are done. SSH encrypts network communications for security.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-135

Student Notebook

Using remote HMC commands (2 of 2) IBM Power Systems

• Commands have --help option and man pages. • Example commands include: – Show processor usage by partition. $ lshwres -m msname -r proc --level lpar \ –F lpar_name,run_procs --header lpar_name,run_procs LPAR1,0 LPAR2,1 LPAR3,0

– Reboot the HMC immediately. $ hmcshutdown –t now –r

– Show HMC network configuration. $ lshmc -n

– List system connections. $ lssysconn –r all © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-113. Using remote HMC commands (2 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: HMC commands When you have logged in, you can execute the echo $PATH command to see which directories are available to you in the HMC’s restricted shell. You can only run the commands in these directories and the shell commands are restricted as well. List each of the directories listed in the echo $PATH output to see a listing of the commands that are available. For usage information, run the commands with the --help option or access the man pages. For example, man hmcshutdown will display the manual page for that command. The man pages show more information than the --help information.

3-136 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

SSH login environment on the HMC IBM Power Systems

• HMC provides restricted shell: – SSH is a secure shell program. • It is the only remote login method to access HMC command line.

– Passwords and public key authentication are in use. – Need to contact IBM technical support for a temporary root access. – Example operations that are not allowed include: • cd, redirection, su

– All the commands are listed in the following paths: hscroot@hmc> echo $PATH /hmcrbin/:/usr/hmcrbin

• For example, under /hmcrbin: hscroot@hmc> ls /hmcrbin/ cat ls netstat ping6 date mount ping sleep

sort umount

uname

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-114. SSH login environment on the HMC

AN113.0

Notes: Restricted shell environment As SSH is the only remote login method, and the default shell startup files are copied at each login, you get a restricted shell. This is true even if you bring up a shell on the physical HMC. Users, even hscroot, cannot run the su command. The only way to escape from the restrictions is to obtain access to the root shell. If necessary, IBM Technical Support can supply a password that allows you to access a shell where you can su to root. This is covered on the next visual. Warning The restricted shell controls are for the protection of the HMC environment. The configuration of the HMC is much more complex than just a Linux system and if you were able to alter system files, your HMC might become unusable and you will need to reload the software.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-137

Student Notebook

HMC CLI: What is available then? (1 of 2) IBM Power Systems

• sed and scp are available. • Can list out directories and cat files outside of $PATH. • HMC commands allow you to manually run commands that are in the web browser user interface: – You can write scripts. – Commands have man pages.

• Temporary (one day) root access can be obtained with IBM approval: – It requires a good reason and opening a call. – You will need to create a service user named hscpe and retrieve HMC serial number (lshmc –v).

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-115. HMC CLI: What is available then? (1 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: You can edit files with sed and remotely copy files with scp. You can list the contents of directories and cat files. You can list out directories if you know their names. Because you cannot use the cd command, you need to provide full path names to explore the system. You can enable vi command line editing with the set -o vi command. rnvi command rnvi - HMC restricted-nvi text editor: rnvi enables users to edit a text file in a restricted mode. The rnvi command invokes the nvi command in a chroot environment. The rnvi command must be issued from the user's home directory and only one file can be specified on the command line.

3-138 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

HMC commands To list the commands that are available, use echo $PATH to see which directories are available, then list the contents of each directory in turn. For example: hscroot@hmc> echo $PATH /hmcrbin/:/usr/hmcrbin hscroot@hmc> ls /hmcrbin cat date ls mount netstat ping ping6 sleep sort umount uname If you have to administer several managed systems, you can achieve consistent results by using the command-line interface. The command sequence can be stored in scripts and run remotely. After you have developed a consistent way to manage the managed systems, you can automate the operations by invoking the scripts from batch-processing applications, such as the cron daemon, from other systems. More information on commands in the Information Center If you search for HMC tasks in the Information Center search window, you will see not only the list of tasks each default task role can perform, but it also lists out the HMC command that corresponds to each task. Scripts with HMC commands You can write scripts that contain ssh commands that run HMC commands. When you run this script on a system, the ssh commands in the script run the HMC commands remotely on the HMC. You will need to configure SSH between the remote system and the HMC to allow for remote HMC commands without requiring the hscroot password. An example line in a script might look like the following where lssyscfg is an HMC command, hmcname is the HMC’s host name, and msname is the managed system name: ssh -l hscroot hmcname "lssyscfg -r lpar -m -F state,lpar_id"

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-139

Student Notebook

HMC CLI: What is available then? (2 of 2) IBM Power Systems

• You can shut down or reboot HMC remotely from web browser or use command line. • You can open remote virtual terminals to partitions: – Use mkvterm or vtmenu. – mkvterm example:

Enter at HMC shell prompt

Enter ~. to end (can log out first)

mkvterm –m --id AIX Version 7 Copyright IBM Corporation, 1982, 2010. Console login: Last login: Tue Mar 6 17:21:47 2012 on /dev/vty0 # ~. Terminate session? [y/n]

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-116. HMC CLI: What is available then? (2 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: Remote HMC reboot You can use the command line if you want to reboot the HMC remotely. We saw this command earlier in this unit: hmcshutdown -t now -r You can also shutdown or restart the HMC using Shut Down or Restart task from the HMC Management Work pane. Remote virtual terminals (partition consoles) with mkvterm command You can open a remote virtual terminal to a partition with the mkvterm command. You will be in a shell to the partition. When you are done, log out, and type ~. to end the session and return to the HMC shell. An alternate syntax for the mkvterm command shown in the visual is as follows, where managedsystem is replaced with the actual managed system name and lparname is replaced with the partition name: mkvterm -m managedsystem -p lparname

3-140 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Closing a remote terminal If a remote terminal to a partition is already open, you will receive an error. Use the rmvterm command to remove that other connection so that you can make one. Hopefully, someone is not actively using that other remote terminal. Remote virtual terminals with vtmenu command The vtmenu HMC command will list a menu of partitions for you to choose. After you choose one, it opens a remove virtual terminal to that partition.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-141

Student Notebook

Remote access security: Overview IBM Power Systems

• Review: – – – – – –

HMC and service processor use SSL for secure communications. HMC users and tasks are unique to each HMC. HMC firewall options on the Ethernet interface. Restricted SSH for HMC command line access. SSH and remote console access can be disabled or enabled. Secure remote web access can be disabled or enabled.

• Additional security topics: – Virtual console communications: • SSL encrypted when using remote web connection. • Uses SSL also when using the physical HMC.

– Can configure HMC access without a password. – Web browser to HMC communications: • SSL encrypted by default. • Certificate authority is issued by the HMC (self-signed certificate).

– Can create a new self-signed certificate or a certificate signed by a trusted third party. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-117. Remote access security: Overview

AN113.0

Notes: HMC and managed system use SSL The HMC to service processor private network uses SSL for a secure connection. For SSL, we need user IDs and passwords on the service processor and there are default user IDs admin and general already set up, and an additional HMC user ID when HMC is connected. The service processor issues the SSL certificate and this SSL connection is established when the managed server is added to the HMC. When you connect the HMC to the managed system and apply power, and the state of the managed system is Pending Authorization, click the managed system name and you will be prompted to set up the three passwords. Be sure to document these in a safe place.

3-142 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Topic 2: Checkpoint IBM Power Systems

1. Which of the following statements about HMC users are true? a. When you create an HMC user, it exists only on that HMC. b. Task roles describe the procedures that users can perform. c. You can set multiple task roles and multiple managed resource roles for a user. d. A user with a custom task role can be created which allows the user to access only the HMC command line and not the web browser user interface. 2. List HMC remote access options. 3. What must be configured to provide SSH access to the HMC command line? 4. True or False: The communication between a remote web browser and the HMC is SSL encrypted by default. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-118. Topic 2: Checkpoint

AN113.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-143

Student Notebook

Checkpoint (1 of 2) IBM Power Systems

1. Which of the following statements are true? a. When you apply power to the managed system, the service processor searches for a DHCP server for its IP address. b. If it does not find a DHCP server, it waits for one to contact it. c. The IP address for the service processor can be set to any valid IP address. d. The network configuration for the service processor can be changed in the ASMI application.

2. True or False: An important part of setting up the managed system connection to the HMC is to not apply power to the managed system until the HMC is configured. 3. True or False: The virtual console communications are encrypted.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-119. Checkpoint (1 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes:

3-144 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Checkpoint (2 of 2) IBM Power Systems

4. How do you reboot the HMC remotely? 5. What is the difference between a user account and a task role? 6. Besides the firewall options, what are the remote access options that can be enabled or disabled on the HMC V7? 7. True or False: The HMC can be used as a fully functional Linux system.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-120. Checkpoint (2 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-145

Student Notebook

Exercise: Exploring the HMC V7 interface IBM Power Systems

Unit exerc ise

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-121. Exercise: Exploring the HMC V7 interface

AN113.0

Notes:

3-146 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Unit summary IBM Power Systems

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: • List the LPAR-related functions of the HMC • Describe how to connect the HMC to the managed system • Describe the new HMC version 7 web-based management console and the web user interface (WUI) structure • Use the Guided Setup wizard for HMC network configuration • Add a managed system to the HMC application • Reboot the HMC • Configure the HMC network parameters • Create HMC users • Configure and assign task roles and managed resource roles • Configure HMC remote access options • Enable and disable remote virtual console support • Log in to the HMC command line and use HMC commands • Describe security options for HMC communication © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-122. Unit summary

AN113.0

Notes: More summary information: • The HMC is a separate system that is required to create and manage partitions. • The HMC is connected to one or more managed systems with an Ethernet connection. • The Guided Setup wizard can be used to set up a new HMC. - Including users, date/time, and the network configuration. • HMC menus allow you to configure the HMC and manage partitions and managed systems. - Including access to the partition’s consoles and service tools. • Remote access options allow you to use the HMC from the network: - Web connection and command line options. - Communications are SSL encrypted by default.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

3-147

Student Notebook

3-148 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance What this unit is about This unit describes the procedures for performing maintenance tasks on the HMC and the managed system.

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Back up critical console data • Schedule regular critical console data backups • Describe the following procedures: - Install corrective service code on the HMC - Prepare for an HMC upgrade - Perform an HMC upgrade - Perform an HMC reload - Install managed system firmware updates.

How you will check your progress Accountability: • Checkpoint questions • Machine exercises

References http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/systems/index.jsp  IBM System p and AIX Information Center http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/power/software/virtualization/index. html  IBM PowerVM web portal https://www14.software.ibm.com/webapp/set2/sas/f/hmc/home.html http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/  IBM Technical Support websites

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-1

Student Notebook

Unit objectives IBM Power Systems

After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Back up critical console data • Schedule regular critical console data backups • Describe the following procedures: – Install corrective service code on the HMC – Prepare for an HMC upgrade – Perform an HMC upgrade – Perform an HMC reload – Install managed system firmware updates

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-1. Unit objectives

AN113.0

Notes: This unit discusses the maintenance of the software and configuration information on the HMC. It also describes how to perform firmware updates for the managed system.

4-2

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

The major maintenance components IBM Power Systems

• Server firmware: – POWER Hypervisor – Flexible Service Processor (FSP) – Bulk Power Controller (BPC)

• HMC – Updates and upgrades

• Partition maintenance: OS – AIX, IBM i, Linux

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-2. The major maintenance components

AN113.0

Notes: This visual depicts the three major pieces of maintenance. But before we initiate any updates, let us first perform a backup of the entity we need to update, for example the HMC.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-3

Student Notebook

Backup critical console data (1 of 3) IBM Power Systems

• Back up critical console data to a media on local system, mounted remote system, or send critical data to a remote site. – Used for restoring HMC data during HMC recovery

• Backup data includes: – HMC user configuration – HMC configuration (network) – HMC log entries – Any partition profile data backup files – Applied corrective service updates (service packs, OS security updates)

• Backup does not include: – List of scheduled operations – Remote command execution setting

• Can schedule backup operations for a specific time or schedule them to repeat.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-3. Backup critical console data (1 of 3)

AN113.0

Notes: Back up the HMC after you have made changes to the HMC configuration or to the information associated with partitions. You can set up an automated backup of critical console data through the HMC Management > Schedule Operations task from the HMC workplace window. Backup critical console data The visual lists the types of items that are backed up as part of a critical console data backup. Basically, it is every configurable item on the HMC with the exceptions of the scheduled operations and enable/disable settings for remote access to the HMC. Be sure to document these items manually and remember to reconfigure them if you need to re-install the HMC software. The HMC software itself is not backed up as part of this procedure. When you save HMC data, you cannot choose which pieces of the software you want to save. The HMC saves all pertinent configuration.

4-4

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Partition profile data Recall that when you perform a backup of profile data for all the partitions using this option, select Configuration > Manage Partition Data > Backup. Backup files of the profile data are created on the HMC hard drive. These backup files are saved in the Back up Critical Console Data operation. Even if you have neglected to perform a backup operation of profile data, a backup file, named backupFile, is written whenever you make a profile configuration change so this backup will be saved as part of the critical console backup.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-5

Student Notebook

Backup critical console data (2 of 3) IBM Power Systems

Backup options

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-4. Backup critical console data (2 of 3)

AN113.0

Notes: The visual shows the window that opens after you click the Backup HMC Data task shown on the last visual. You can back up critical console data to a media on local system, mounted remote system, or send critical data to a remote site. Click HMC Management in the navigation area and choose the Backup HMC Data task. If the backup of critical console data will be to DVD-RAM, first you must format the DVD in the DVD-RAM format before you can save data to the DVD. To format a DVD, click HMC Management > Format Media.

4-6

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Backup critical console data (3 of 3) IBM Power Systems

• Back up to a remote system.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-5. Backup critical console data (3 of 3)

AN113.0

Notes: This window opens for the remote site information where the critical console data backup file will be sent with FTP. Enter the server address, user ID and password and click OK to perform the backup. Remote site information Enter the host name of the remote system where you want the backup file to be stored. This host must be accessible on the network. The user ID and password are for the account on the remote site and will be used in the FTP process to log in to the remote system. The backup file will be placed in that user ID’s default home directory. Make sure there is enough room for the backup on the file system. If you choose to save the backup file to a remote site, you will need to configure the HMC network configuration information manually before restoring the rest of the HMC’s configuration from the backup file.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-7

Student Notebook

Scheduling backups (1 of 2) IBM Power Systems

• The only HMC operation that can be scheduled is backup critical console data. • You can schedule one operation or schedule them to repeat.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-6. Scheduling backups (1 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: You can schedule critical console data backups to occur at sometime in the future and you can schedule backups to happen regularly. To get to this feature, Select HMC Management > Schedule Operations from the HMC workplace window. Then in the Customized Scheduled Operations window, click Options > New. The Add an Operation window opens. Click the only option available: Backup Critical Console Data. Click OK to continue.

4-8

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Scheduling backups (2 of 2) IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-7. Scheduling backups (2 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: Schedule date and time This option enables you to schedule the date and time for backing up critical console information. You must provide the time and date that you want the operation to occur. You can schedule a backup to occur once, or you can set up a repeated schedule. For a repeated schedule, click the Repeat tab. Schedule single or repeat operations Specify either a single or repeated operation. Refer to the unit about dynamic resource allocation for more information about scheduling operations. The interval specifies the time between operations and the example in the visual above shows that this operation will happen every other week (that is, two weeks between each operation). Repetitions is how long you want the operations to continue. Click Save to save the new operation.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-9

Student Notebook

Check HMC code IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-8. Check HMC code

AN113.0

Notes: Just hover the cursor over the HMC Version on the Welcome screen or select Updates. Or under Updates task group in the navigation area: View of all Power servers managed by this HMC showing the installed Power firmware levels.

4-10 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

HMC update methods IBM Power Systems

• There are two methods of HMC software release upgrades: – Install from removable media. • To install corrective service from CDs or DVDs which you can order from Fix Central or which you can create yourself by downloading ISO images from Fix Central.

– Install from a remote system (one of your remote systems or the Internet). • To install corrective service from ZIP file images which you can download to one of your remote systems that accepts FTP requests.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-9. HMC update methods

AN113.0

Notes: Install corrective service from removable media (CD-ROMs) Use this method to install corrective service from CDs or DVDs which you can order from Fix Central or from your IBM service representative, or which you can create yourself by downloading ISO images from Fix Central, and then burning your own CDs. Install corrective service from a remote system (ZIP files) Use this method to install corrective service from ZIP file images which you can download to one of your remote systems that accepts FTP requests, or which you can install from the Internet.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-11

Student Notebook

HMC corrective service IBM Power Systems

• A corrective service is a minor software update or fix. – It typically changes the minor version level.

• HMC corrective service information and downloads can be obtained from through Fix Central. • Procedure: – Perform a critical console data backup (just in case). – Download iso file from Internet (or obtain a CD-ROM with the fix). – From the HMC Install Corrective Service application, install the fix. • Updates > Update HMC (button)

– Reboot HMC. – Check that the version level is what you expect. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-10. HMC corrective service

AN113.0

Notes: A corrective fix updates the minor version level of code on the HMC. Corrective fixes can be obtained by ordering them on a CD-ROM or by downloading them either to the HMC itself or to a remote system that the HMC is able to connect to using FTP or mountable file system. Monitor the IBM HMC Corrective Fixes website to find out about corrective fix information and obtain downloads. Before installing corrective service on the HMC you should perform a backup of the critical console data and locate the recovery CD media for the current HMC code level, to ensure your current HMC is recoverable in the event of a problem. You should also determine what level of code exists on your HMC. HMC technical support website The current IBM strategy for all maintenance tasks is to direct you the Fix Central. There is a subscription service with which you can register and have notices sent to you when there are HMC updates and security fixes available. This can be found at http://www.ibm.com/systems/power/support, look for the link to Subscription Service. 4-12 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Find the current level of HMC code The current levels of the HMC version, release, and build are listed at the top of the Updates application. Look under the heading HMC Code Level. When you know what level of HMC software you have, check the IBM website to see whether fixes are available for your software release.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-13

Student Notebook

Install Corrective Service IBM Power Systems

• Choose how to install. • For network installation, enter file location and login information.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-11. HMC Corrective Service

AN113.0

Notes: You can download the corrective fix file from the Internet directly to the HMC or to another system that is accessible to the HMC from the network. One of the partitions on the managed system works well for this. Install corrective service In the HMC workplace window, click Updates > Update HMC, the Install Corrective Service window opens. This is the window shown in the visual. Select the appropriate installation option, whether from media or from the network. The rest of the steps shown below assume you chose the second option Download the corrective service file from a remote system. The HMC interface retrieves the update package from the remote FTP server and begins the install process. 1. Reboot the HMC after the installation of the update has completed. Rebooting ensures that all changes are available immediately.

4-14 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

2. Verify a successful update. Check the HMC release level from the Updates workplace window.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-15

Student Notebook

Fix Central: Select HMC fixes (1 of 5) IBM Power Systems

• Enter the machine type model number. • Use the wizard to determine maintenance target and compatibility considerations.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-12. Fix Central: Select HMC fixes (1 of 5)

AN113.0

Notes: Fix Central provides fixes and updates for your system's software, hardware, and operating system: http://www.ibm.com/support/fixcentral/.

4-16 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Fix Central: Select HMC fixes (2 of 5) IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-13. Fix Central: Select HMC fixes (2 of 5)

AN113.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-17

Student Notebook

Fix Central: Select HMC fixes (3 of 5) IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-14. Fix Central: Select HMC fixes (3 of 5)

AN113.0

Notes: In this example, assume the most HMC current level was V7R7.4.0.

4-18 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Fix Central: Select HMC fixes (4 of 5) IBM Power Systems

• After clicking Description to display more information:

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-15. Fix Central: Select HMC fixes (4 of 5)

AN113.0

Notes: This gives a detailed description of the HMC code update.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-19

Student Notebook

Fix Central: Select HMC fixes (5 of 5) IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-16. Fix Central: Select HMC fixes (5 of 5)

AN113.0

Notes:

4-20 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

HMC software upgrades IBM Power Systems

• HMC upgrade procedure: 1. Back up critical console data to DVD (just in case). • Do not make any configuration changes between this step and the next.

2. Save upgrade data. • This saves data to special area on HMC disk.

3. Put new HMC product media in drive. 4. Reboot HMC. 5. Select upgrade when asked. • You will be prompted to insert second CD.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-17. HMC software upgrades

AN113.0

Notes: A software upgrade is different from a corrective service in that it is more than just a fix of the current functionality. Look for new features, enhancements, and new applications when you install a software upgrade. When you are upgrading the HMC software at the same time that you will be updating the firmware on the managed system, upgrade the HMC first so that it will recognize the new version of firmware. Save upgrade data The HMC Save Upgrade Data task saves all of the HMC configuration information to a special area on the HMC’s hard disk drive. When you boot the HMC from the product media and choose Upgrade (rather than Install/Recovery), it will load the HMC configuration information from the special area. It will not ask you for a critical console data backup. In the procedure in the visual, the Back up Critical Console Data step is included just in case something goes wrong during the software upgrade and you need to perform a full © Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-21

Student Notebook

install of the HMC at the existing software level. See the HMC reload process in this unit for more information about that procedure. You should only save upgrade data immediately prior to upgrading your HMC software to a new release. This allows you to restore previous levels if you need to recover the HMC. Be aware that only one level of upgrade data is allowed. Each time you save upgrade data, the previous level is overwritten.

4-22 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Prepare for HMC software upgrades IBM Power Systems

• This tool saves the HMC configuration information in a special area on the HMC disk. – The HMC upgrade program will find this data and restore it.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-18. Prepare for HMC software upgrades

AN113.0

Notes: Save Upgrade Data In the HMC workplace window, select HMC Management. Then in the tasks list, select Save Upgrade Data. Select Hard Drive and click Next. Perform this task to store system information in preparation for an HMC upgrade. When you complete this process, the HMC saves configuration data, such as: • System preferences • Profile information • Service applications files Note Only perform this task immediately prior to upgrading your HMC software from one release to another. Any configuration changes made after performing this task will not be migrated to the new HMC software release.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-23

Student Notebook

HMC reload procedure IBM Power Systems

• What if you need to rebuild the entire HMC? – Example: HMC boot disk is replaced.

• Reinstalling the HMC interface: 1. Insert the HMC product media into DVD-RAM drive. 2. Reboot the HMC. 3. Select the Install/Recovery process (not Upgrade). 4. When prompted, insert your backup DVD-RAM, if you have one. 5. HMC will need to reboot, after which install will continue. 6. When install is finished, verify the HMC level. 7. If necessary, restore remote critical console data backup (not on DVD): a. Set up HMC network parameters. b. Use Restore HMC Data task under HMC Management to restore the Critical Console Data backup. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-19. HMC reload procedure

AN113.0

Notes: If you replace the HMC, its hard drive, or for some reason need to perform a completely new installation, you must reinstall the HMC product software and your configuration data. Reinstalling the HMC 1. With the HMC powered off, place the HMC software product media in the DVD-RAM drive. Power on your HMC. 2. When the HMC boots, a window opens with the following options: a. Install/Recovery b. Upgrade 3. Select the Install/Recovery option. 4. When the installation is complete, the DVD ejects from the drive. Remove the HMC product media from the drive and close the DVD-RAM drive. Press Enter to reboot HMC.

4-24 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Additional steps There are a few additional steps that might need to occur: • If the HMC needs to be upgraded because your Recovery CD does not include the latest upgrades, you will need to perform the upgrade process. • You might need to check a few of the settings on the HMC after performing a new install even when using a backup DVD-RAM. The enable/disable ssh settings and the scheduled operations configurations are not backed up by the Back up Critical Console Data operation. Restore from a remote system (rather than DVD) If the critical console data has been archived remotely, the network settings must be re-configured manually to enable access to the remote system after the HMC is newly installed. Then from the HMC Management workplace window, select the Restore HMC Data task. Select the type of remote restore. If you choose to restore from remote NFS server, follow the directions on the screen to restore the critical console data. The data is then copied to the HMC from the remote system and will automatically be installed when the system is rebooted. If you choose to restore from remote FTP server, follow the directions on the screen to restore the critical console data. The data is then copied to the HMC from the remote system and will automatically be installed when the system is rebooted.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-25

Student Notebook

Managed system firmware update (1 of 2) IBM Power Systems

• Managed system firmware (Licensed Internal Code) updates: – Server firmware – Power subsystem firmware – I/O adapter and device firmware

• Types of firmware maintenance: – Concurrent (must use an HMC) – Disruptive • Reboot of managed system is necessary.

– Deferred • Fixes can be installed concurrently, but they will not be activated until the next IPL.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-20. Managed system firmware update (1 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: Firmware updates The HMC provides methods for maintaining Licensed Internal Code (also called firmware) for the managed system. You can choose to install fixes for POWER firmware through the HMC or through the operating system. There are various types of firmware updates for the server, the power subsystem, and various devices on the system. All of these can be updated from the HMC. These updates might be disruptive, in which case the managed system will automatically reboot after the install, they might be concurrent which means the managed system does not, and does not need to be, rebooted after the fix is installed. They might be also deferred. What does deferred mean? Concurrent levels of system firmware might, on occasion, contain fixes that are deferred. These deferred fixes can be installed concurrently, but will not be activated until the next IPL.

4-26 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Managed system firmware update (2 of 2) IBM Power Systems

To examine current LIC levels

Firmware update © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-21. Managed system firmware update (2 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: HMC updates If you need to upgrade to a whole new firmware release, this is done with the Upgrade Licensed Internal Code to option. If you are upgrading to a new release, you can obtain images from an online source; however, they must be applied from a CD-ROM. For example, you might obtain the CD from IBM, or you might download an ISO image from an online source and create your own CD. This CD is used to upgrade the release level of the managed system firmware. View current firmware level The Updates pane displays the Hardware Management Console code level and the system code levels (the current firmware level). But there is another way to determine your current firmware level of the managed system is to select one managed system, then select the View System Information option. A window will open and ask for the location of the LIC repository. You can choose None, an IBM website, the IBM support system, and so forth as locations.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-27

Student Notebook

Examine current firmware level IBM Power Systems

• This example shows that the current permanent system firmware image is AL710_099.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-22. Examine current firmware level

AN113.0

Notes: This visual shows that the current permanent system firmware image is AL710_099, and the current temporary system firmware image is AL710_117.

4-28 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Obtaining new firmware IBM Power Systems

• Check http://www.ibm.com/support/fixcentral/ for latest level and service pack:

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-23. Obtaining new firmware

AN113.0

Notes: Check the Fix Central website for the latest firmware level. Select the model number you are interested in and click Continue. This will take you to a page listing all the firmware updates for your system. Then click the Description link for more detailed information. The description link has lots of information such as how to read firmware level names, how to find the current firmware level of your system, how to download firmware, how to install new firmware, and if the update is concurrent, deferred or disruptive.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-29

Student Notebook

Change LIC for current release (1 of 2) IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-24. Change LIC for current release (1 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: The next visuals show a series of windows that open when you choose the Change Licensed Internal Code for option from the Updates workplace window of the HMC. FTP site An FTP server holds the server or power subsystem fix. It is any system on which you have activated the FTP server protocol. Normally, your HMC only has the FTP client active. The remote site can be IBM, if you are downloading the fix directly from there to your managed system, or it can be another system where you have already downloaded the fix. For example, you downloaded the fix to an FTP server yesterday. Today, you want to retrieve the fix from the FTP server so you can download it to the server at your site. You must specify the directory on the FTP server that holds the server or power subsystem fix. You can specify the default directory /opt/ccfw/data, or you can change the directory path if the fix is in a directory other than the default directory.

4-30 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Change LIC wizard screens The Licensed Internal Code (LIC) windows will show information on the type of update that will be performed. If you click the View Information button will show the current release installed on the system and the one you want to select. When you install changes to your firmware, you have options: • Concurrent install and activate: Fixes can be applied without interrupting running partitions and restarting managed system. • Concurrent install with deferred disruptive activate: Fixes can be applied as delayed and activated the next time the managed system is restarted. • Disruptive install with activate: Fixes can only be applied by turning off the managed system. You want to choose the option that fits the status of the server that you are updating. For example, you do not want to use a disruptive installation option on a server that is in production. However, on a test server, this option might not be an issue.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-31

Student Notebook

Change LIC for current release (2 of 2) IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-25. Change LIC for current release (2 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: Accept the LIC agreement Read through the agreement, and click Accept to proceed with the update. Starting the firmware update Click Finish in the final screen to proceed. You will then see a Starting operation status message, followed some time later by a Completed status message.

4-32 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Checkpoint IBM Power Systems

1. Can critical console data be restored on a different HMC? 2. True or False: Performing a Backup Critical Console Data backs up all partition configuration data. 3. From where is your HMC configuration information restored during the upgrade process? 4. From where is your HMC configuration data restored during the installation/recovery process? 5. List two things that the Backup Critical Console Data option backs up.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-26. Checkpoint

AN113.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-33

Student Notebook

Exercise: HMC and managed system maintenance IBM Power Systems

Unit exerc ise

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-27. Exercise: HMC and managed system maintenance

AN113.0

Notes:

4-34 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Unit summary IBM Power Systems

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: • Back up critical console data • Schedule regular critical console data backups • Describe the following procedures: – Install corrective service code on the HMC – Prepare for an HMC upgrade – Perform an HMC upgrade – Perform an HMC reload – Install managed system firmware updates

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-28. Unit summary

AN113.0

Notes: More summary information: • Critical console data backup can be done manually or be scheduled. • Corrective service code for the HMC can be installed from the HMC. • HMC software can be upgraded from the HMC. • The critical data on the HMC can be recovered and loaded on a new HMC installation (disaster recovery). • The managed system firmware can be updated from the HMC. - The update can be disruptive or concurrent.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

4-35

Student Notebook

4-36 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Unit 5. System power management What this unit is about This unit describes the power on process for Power Systems servers.

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Describe the role of the operator panel on an LPAR-capable system • Power on a managed system using the following power-on options: - Normal, system profile, or hardware discovery • Power off the managed system • Enable the Power Saver mode

How you will check your progress Accountability: • Checkpoint questions • Machine exercises

References http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/systems/index.jsp  IBM System p and AIX Information Center

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 5. System power management

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

5-1

Student Notebook

Unit objectives IBM Power Systems

After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Describe the role of the operator panel on an LPAR-capable system • Power on a managed system using the following power-on options: – Normal, system profile, or hardware discovery

• Power off the managed system • Enable the Power Saver mode

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 5-1. Unit objectives

AN113.0

Notes:

5-2

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Managed system power states IBM Power Systems

Plug in managed system. Level 1: Power off The service processor is operational including ASMI. All other system devices are powered off. Issue power on command. Level 2: Standby All devices are initialized and powered on. System is ready to support partitions. Start first partition. Level 3: Operating System is running partitions. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 5-2. Managed system power states

AN113.0

Notes: This visual summarizes conceptually the three overall power levels for a managed system. These should not be confused with the three power on options that will be discussed in a few pages. When the service processor is operational the Advanced System Management Interface (ASMI) application can be accessed by using a browser to connect to the service processor’s IP address. The ASMI allows you to set flags that affect the operation of the system, such as auto power restart, and to view information about the system, such as the error log and vital product data.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 5. System power management

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

5-3

Student Notebook

Level 1: Power off The first power level is achieved by plugging in the power cord of the managed system into a live power socket. The HMC will report that the managed system is in the Power Off state. No additional buttons need to be pushed and no commands need to be issued. The service processor will be initialized and the service processor software will be loaded and run. If your system has an Operator Panel, you will see codes on the display panel and after a few minutes, you will also see a steady blinking green light. The HMC will also display the codes and status information for the managed system. At this point, the service processor is an active host on the network. You can use the ASMI application on the service processor; however, the rest of the devices, such as disks, processors, and so forth, on the managed system are still powered off. Level 2: Standby To advance to the second power on level, a power-on command must be issued to the managed system. At this point, all devices are initialized and ready to use however, no partitions are running yet, so their devices are not yet in use. Do not attempt to remove hardware from the system at this level. The HMC will report that the managed system is in the Standby state. Level 3: Operating Once you start the first partition on the system, your managed system will be at the third and highest power on level. The HMC will report the state of the managed system as Operating. This means it has been fully powered on, initialized, and is running at least one partition. With the proper procedures and commands, hot-pluggable devices can be physically removed from the partitions. When your managed system is in the Operating state, it remains there until you issue a power off command or a system error changes the state. If you shut down all of the partitions, but do not power off the managed system, the HMC will still report the Operating state; however, at this point, the system is in a state functionally equivalent to the Standby state.

5-4

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Managed system power on and off IBM Power Systems

• Physical power on button – Can be used for power on

• HMC managed system power on command – Can choose power on options

• Power off: – Use HMC power off command – Shut down partitions first before powering off managed system

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 5-3. Managed system power on and off

AN113.0

Notes: Basic power up After the required cables are installed, and the power cables are connected, the power button on the operator panel can be pushed to initialize the system.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 5. System power management

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

5-5

Student Notebook

Managed system power on options IBM Power Systems

• Power on options: – Normal – Hardware Discovery – System profile

Power on

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 5-4. Managed system power on options

AN113.0

Notes: The visual shows a managed system in the Power Off state. The HMC menu is shown where you can choose to power on the system. This is the selected menu when the managed system is selected. The next visual shows you the screen that displays after choosing Power On on the menu. HMC command for managed system power on The chsysstate HMC command can also be used in an SSH session to change the state of the managed system or partitions. Specific examples of power on commands will be shown on the following pages. Scheduling the managed system power on If desired, you can schedule an automatic managed system power on for a particular date and time and it can be scheduled to repeat. Select the server in the Systems Management Work pane; then expand Operations menu in the Tasks Pad and select Schedule Operations task. We will discuss scheduling operations in a later unit.

5-6

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Power on: Normal IBM Power Systems

• Select this option to specify that the HMC uses the current setting for the partition start policy to determine how to power on the managed system.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 5-5. Power on: Normal

AN113.0

Notes: Normal: Select this option to specify that the HMC uses the current setting for the partition start policy to determine how to power on the managed system. The current setting can be one of the following values: • Auto-Start Always: This option specifies that the HMC power on logical partitions automatically after the managed system powers on. If powering on the managed system is the result of a user action, the HMC starts all partitions that are configured for automatic start up. If powering on the managed system is the result of an automatic recovery process, the HMC starts only those logical partitions that were running at the time the system powered off. This option is always available for selection. • Auto-Start for Auto-Recovery: This option specifies that the HMC power on logical partitions automatically only after the managed system powers on as the result of an automatic recovery process. This option is available for selection only when the firmware for the managed system supports this advanced IPL capability.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 5. System power management

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

5-7

Student Notebook

• User-Initiated: This option specifies that the HMC does not start any logical partitions when the managed system powers on. You must start logical partitions manually on the managed system by using the HMC. This option is available for selection only when the firmware for the managed system supports this advanced IPL capability. You can set the partition start policy from the Power On Parameters page of the Properties task for the managed system. The Partition standby power on option allows you to power on the managed system to a state where it will support the creation and activation of partitions. No partitions will automatically start. You can use this option if you want to manually activate partitions or if it is a new system that does not yet have any partitions. The managed system state will be Standby. The HMC command chsysstate can be used to power on or off the managed system.

5-8

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Power on: System Profile IBM Power Systems

All server’s system profiles will be listed. Select one and click OK.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 5-6. Power on: System Profile

AN113.0

Notes: System Profile Selecting this power-on option specifies that the HMC power on the system and its logical partitions based on a predefined system profile. When you select this power-on option, you must select the partition profile that you want the HMC to use to activate logical partitions on the managed system.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 5. System power management

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

5-9

Student Notebook

Power on: Hardware Discovery IBM Power Systems

• Capture information about all I/O devices in the managed system. • After inventory, managed system in operating state. – All logical partitions in power-off state.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 5-7. Power on: Hardware Discovery

AN113.0

Notes: Hardware Discovery: Selecting this power-on option specifies that the HMC run the Hardware Discovery process when the managed system powers on. The Hardware Discovery process captures information about all I/O devices -- in particular, those devices not currently assigned to partitions. When you select the Hardware Discovery power on option for a managed system, the managed system is powered on into a special mode which performs the hardware discovery. After the Hardware Discovery process is complete, the system will be in Operating state with any partitions in the power-off state. The Hardware Discovery process records the hardware inventory in a cache on the managed system. The collected information is then available for use when displaying data for I/O devices or when creating a system plan based on the managed system. This option is available only if the system is capable of using the Hardware Discovery process to capture I/O hardware inventory for the managed system.

5-10 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

System initialization (1 of 2) IBM Power Systems

• After power on, the system state will change and codes will appear. – Codes can be seen in Reference Code column.

In the process of powering on.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 5-8. System initialization (1 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: Managed system states After we choose one of the power on options, the state of the managed system will change from Power Off to Initializing. At this point, you’ll see many codes appear in the Reference Code column. After the system finishes initializing, the state might change to standby if partition standby was the power on option. As soon as a partition is activated the managed system state will change to Operating. If the state is Authorization Failure, it means that your HMC and your managed system do not agree on the password to use to communicate with each other. Reference codes You can view the latest codes that have appeared in the Reference Code column of the Systems Management > servers work pane by looking under the Serviceability application, clicking the Reference Code History option.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 5. System power management

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

5-11

Student Notebook

System initialization (2 of 2) IBM Power Systems

• The managed system initialized and operational.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 5-9. System initialization (2 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: This visual shows an example of an HMC with its managed system in Operating state.

5-12 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Power Off managed system (1 of 2) IBM Power Systems

• First, shut down the operating system in each partition. • If you want to power off the system with before shutting down the partitions: – You will get a window asking if you want to continue or not.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 5-10. Power Off managed system (1 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: Power Off Powering off the managed system will make all partitions unavailable until the system is again powered on. Before you power off the managed system, ensure that all logical partitions have been shut down and that their states have changed from Running to Not Activated. If you do not shutdown all logical partitions on the managed system before you power off the managed system, the managed system shuts down each logical partition before the managed system itself powers off. This can cause a substantial delay in powering off the managed system, particularly if the logical partitions are not responsive. Further, the logical partitions might shutdown abnormally, which could result in data loss and further delays when you activate the logical partitions once more. The HMC command chsysstate can be used to power on or off the managed system.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 5. System power management

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

5-13

Student Notebook

Power Off managed system (2 of 2) IBM Power Systems

• Power off options – Normal power off is the recommended option.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 5-11. Power off managed system (2 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: After issuing the Power Off Managed System command from the menu, you must choose between the Normal power off and the Fast power off. Choose from the following options: • Normal power off: The Normal power off mode shuts down the system's operations in a controlled manner. During the shutdown, programs running active jobs are allowed to perform cleanup (end-of-job processing). • Fast power off: The Fast power off mode shuts down the system by stopping all active jobs immediately. The programs running those jobs are not allowed to perform any cleanup. Use this option when you need to shut down the system because of an urgent or critical situation.

5-14 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Power Management IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 5-12. Power Management

AN113.0

Notes: Power saver mode Using this menu, you can reduce the system’s power consumption by changing the power saver mode. When the power saver mode is enabled, the system lowers the processor voltage and clock frequency to reduce the power consumption. Enabling the power saver mode on a managed system might affect the accuracy of any performance monitoring tools that are running on the managed system. Changes to the power saver mode take effect immediately without having to restart the managed system.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 5. System power management

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

5-15

Student Notebook

Checkpoint IBM Power Systems

1. List at least two methods of powering on the managed system. 2. What are the different power on options for a managed system? 3. Which option powers up the system using a predefined list of partition profiles? 4. What is the difference between normal and fast power off options? 5. What HMC command can be used to power on or off the managed system?

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 5-13. Checkpoint

AN113.0

Notes:

5-16 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Exercise: System power management IBM Power Systems

Unit exerc ise

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 5-14. Exercise: System power management

AN113.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 5. System power management

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

5-17

Student Notebook

Unit summary IBM Power Systems

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: • Describe the role of the operator panel on an LPAR-capable system • Power on a managed system using these power-on options: – Normal, system profile, or hardware discovery

• Power off the managed system • Enable the Power Saver mode

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 5-15. Unit summary

AN113.0

Notes: More review information: • Most systems have an Operator Panel • Typically, you use the HMC to power on systems • Power on a managed system using these power-on options: - Partition normal, system profile, or hardware discovery - Use HMC Server Management application or HMC commands • Power off the managed system - Be sure to shut down partitions first • You can enable the Power Saver mode if your managed system hardware and firmware support it

5-18 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions What this unit is about This unit describes the basic resource configuration rules for partitions.

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Describe the following partition concepts: - Minimum partition configuration - Maximum number of partitions - Partition IDs and naming conventions - Partition and system profiles • Describe basic processor and memory configuration options • Define minimum, maximum, and desired settings for memory and processors • Describe I/O concepts and the required and desired settings • Use the Create Partition wizard to create a basic partition and a default profile • Edit a partition’s configuration

How you will check your progress Accountability: • Checkpoint questions • Machine exercises

References http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/aix/v7r1/index.jsp  AIX 7.1 Information Center Information Center http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/aix/v7r1/index.jsp  IBM Systems Hardware Information Center

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-1

Student Notebook

Unit objectives IBM Power Systems

After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Describe the following partition concepts: – Minimum partition configuration – Maximum number of partitions – Partition IDs and naming conventions – Partition and system profiles

• Describe basic processor and memory configuration options • Define minimum, maximum, and desired settings for memory and processors • Describe I/O concepts and the required and desired settings • Use the Create Partition wizard to create a basic partition and a default profile • Edit a partition’s configuration © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-1. Unit objectives

AN113.0

Notes: The objectives list what you should be able to do at the end of this unit.

6-2

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Partition environment IBM Power Systems

• The HMC is chosen as the platform management interface. • When partitioned, select the LPAR environment. • Both processor mode and memory modes need to be selected. • Note: Shared memory LPAR is valid only when processor mode is shared processor LPAR.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-2. Partition environment

AN113.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-3

Student Notebook

Partition resources IBM Power Systems

• Resources are allocated to partitions: – Processors, memory, and I/O slots

• LPARs give you the flexibility to allocate resources depending on need and not physical constraints. LPAR 1

LPAR 2

LPAR 3

LPAR 4

Processors

Memory

I/O Slots

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-3. Partition resources

AN113.0

Notes: Divide system resources The first step in planning for dividing up your system’s resources into logical partitions is to decide what partitions you will have and what resources will be assigned to each partition. This step is usually done during the sales process so that you know how large a system you need to purchase. System resources The system resources are processors, memory, and I/O slots. When allocating I/O slots, the granularity is a single I/O slot, which means if several devices are connected to the adapter in a slot, all of the devices are allocated to a single partition.

6-4

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Dividing the system resources (1 of 2) IBM Power Systems

• Minimum partition configuration: – 0.1 processing units if using shared processor pool or 1 processor if dedicated. – 128 MB memory – Access to necessary I/O devices: • Adapter for boot disk • Network adapters

• Smallest granularity for allocating additional resources: – 0.01 processing units if shared; 1 processor if dedicated. – 1 logical memory block (LMB) of memory. • LMB sizes range from 16 to 256 MB. – One I/O slot

• Maximum number of partitions depends on system model and available resources: – Examples: • Maximum for our largest servers is 1024 partitions. • Maximum for a system with 4 physical processors is 40 partitions.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-4. Dividing the system resources (1 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: Logical Memory Block (LMB) The LMB size determines the granularity of memory that can be allocated to a partition. The LMB size varies between 16 MB and 256 MB, depending on the amount of physical memory installed in the system. The default LMB sizes are as follows: Total System Memory 4 GB or less Greater than 4 GB and up to 8 GB Greater than 8 GB and up to 16 GB Greater than 16 GB and up to 32 GB Greater than 32 GB

Default LMB size 16 MB 32 MB 64 MB 128 MB 256 MB

The LMB size can be changed using ASMI and can be found under the Performance Setting menu option. You will need to power-off and then power-on the managed system for the change to take effect.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-5

Student Notebook

Dividing the system resources (2 of 2) IBM Power Systems

• Profiles: – Partition profiles describe resources configurations for partitions. – System profiles are collections of partition profiles.

• Custom groups – These group system resources in a single view.

Partition 1

Partition 2

ProfileA ProfileB ProfileC

ProfileA ProfileB ProfileC

Partition profiles

Partition profiles

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-5. Dividing the system resources (2 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: Partition profile A partition profile is a named configuration of resources for a particular partition. A partition can have multiple partition profiles. For example, on Mondays through Fridays, Partition 1 can be started with the profile named weekday, which contains a maximum of resources. On the weekend, the same partition can be restarted with a profile named weekend, which has a minimum of resources. Or, you might choose to use dynamic LPAR operations to move resources. When partitions are activated (started), you specify the partition profile by name. System profile A system profile is a named set of partition profiles. When you power on the managed system you can choose to activate a particular system profile. A system profile is a list of partition names and associated profiles that you want to activate.

6-6

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Another benefit to system profiles, is that you can select its name and choose Validate from the selected menu. This will check to see if there are any resource contention issues and give you a report on detected conflicts. Custom groups Custom groups provide a mechanism for you to group system resources together in a single view or a way to organize the systems or partitions into smaller business or workload entities. Custom Groups are comprised of logical collections of objects. You can report status on a group basis, allowing you to monitor your system in a way that you prefer. You can also nest groups (a group contained within a group) to provide hierarchical or topology views. There can be one or more user-defined groups already defined on your HMC. There are default groups listed under the Custom Groups node under Server Management. The default groups are All Partitions and All Objects. You can create others, delete the ones that were created, add to created groups, or delete from created groups by using the Manage Custom Groups task. Relationship between system and partition profiles A partition profile belongs to a partition and its name must be unique for that partition. A system profile is simply a collection of partition profiles.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-7

Student Notebook

Creating partitions and profiles IBM Power Systems

• Each partition has at least one profile which contains a configuration for a partition: – Might have more than one profile. – Each has a name unique to that partition (easily changed). – Access the profile properties sheet to view or change the configuration. – Partition profiles are used when partitions are activated (started).

• A partition's properties sheet is the current (in memory) running configuration: – The running configuration might be different from the active profile due to dynamic configuration operations (such as adding memory). – Partition's properties sheet is mostly read only; however, there are a few dynamic (immediate) configuration options.

• Partitions have an LPAR ID which cannot be changed on a partition after it has been created: – Partition's name is easily changed. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-6. Creating partitions and profiles

AN113.0

Notes: Partitions and profiles A partition has a name and an LPAR ID number stored in a table. The name can be different from the host name of that partition and is easily changed. A partition has at least one partition profile. A partition profile is a defined set of resources and attributes that can be used to activate a partition. The active profile is the partition profile used when a running partition was last activated. You view and change configurations through properties sheets. A partition’s properties sheet show the current, running configuration. A profile’s properties sheet shows the configuration that is saved and can be used the next time the partition is activated. There are a limited number of settings in a partition’s properties sheet and these are all dynamic.

6-8

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Memory resources (1 of 2) IBM Power Systems

• Memory allocation: – 1 LMB (16 MB to 256 MB sized logical memory blocks)

• For each partition, configure: – Minimum: • Partition will not start if this amount is not available. • Partition can be decreased to this amount if using dynamic LPAR.

– Desired: • Partition will use up to this amount upon activation if available.

– Maximum: • Partition can be increased to this amount if using dynamic LPAR. • Used for sizing the page table for the partition.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-7. Memory resources (1 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: Memory configuration The system must be able to allocate the minimum amount of memory or the partition will not start. The system will attempt to allocate up to the desired amount of memory, in LMB size increments, when the partition is activated. The minimum setting for memory is also the amount of memory to which you can dynamically shrink the partition. The maximum is the largest amount of memory that the partition can have if you add memory dynamically. You cannot change the maximum amount of memory dynamically. The maximum amount of memory is also the amount that is used when calculating the amount of memory needed for the page tables to support this partition. For this reason, it is not advantageous to set this maximum setting to an unreasonably high amount because it would waste memory by setting memory aside for page tables that the partition doesn’t need.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-9

Student Notebook

Memory resources (2 of 2) IBM Power Systems

• Valid memory ranges are based on a ratio of current and maximum settings. • If you configure an invalid range, AIX will fail to boot: – Fatal Error: Unsupported Memory:MaxMemory Ratio

• POWER5+ or newer servers running AIX 6 or later: – Ratio is 1:8192 (maximum is effectively limitless).

• For all other scenarios: – Partitions configured with less than 256 MB of memory use a ratio of 1:16: • That is, the maximum cannot be >16 times current memory. • Example: 128 MB : 2GB

• Partitions configured with 256 MB or more use a 1:64 ratio. – Example: 1 GB : 64 GB The The current current memory memory value value could could be be as as low low as as the the minimum minimum memory memory setting setting when when aa partition is activated, so use the minimum setting for the low value. partition is activated, so use the minimum setting for the low value. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-8. Memory resources (2 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: Valid memory range details for “all other scenarios” The “all other scenarios” referred to on the visual above means for: • Linux or AIX on servers that do not support 64K memory pages (POWER4 and POWER5 processor based servers). • AIX V5.3 and prior versions running on POWER5+ or newer servers. For these scenarios, the following rules apply: • For partitions that are initially sized less than 256 MB, the maximum size cannot be more than 16 times the current size. This scenario is rarely seen these days since most LPARs won’t boot with less than 256 MB anyway, particularly if they have virtual adapters or Integrated Virtual Ethernet adapter ports. If AIX starts to boot and hangs with no error, it could be because it is not configured with enough memory. • For partitions initially sized 256 MB or larger, the maximum size cannot be more than 64 times the current size.

6-10 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Memory usage (1 of 2) IBM Power Systems

• TCE memory: – Used for Direct Memory Access (DMA) to I/O devices. – Fixed amount for number of I/O slots.

• Page tables for each partition: – Used for mapping partition pages. – Size is 1/64th of partition maximum size.

• Partition memory – Amount you configure for the LPAR.

Partition 1

– Variable in size. – Increases with complexity of server configuration.

Partition 2

Address N

• Hypervisor memory:

{ {

TCE Memory

Partition 2 Memory "chunks"

Page Table

Partition Memory "chunks"

Page Table Hypervisor Memory

Address 0 © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-9. Memory usage (1 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: Memory uses besides what you allocate to a partition Factors influencing the Hypervisor memory requirements include the following: number of logical partitions, partition environments of the logical partitions, number of physical and virtual I/O devices used by the logical partitions, and the amount needed for page tables. • TCE memory is used to translate the I/O addresses to system memory addresses. This is a global amount of memory allocated for the total number of I/O slots on a system regardless of whether they’re actually used or not. • Page tables are used to map physical memory pages to virtual memory pages. Each partition needs 1/64th of its memory size, rounded up to a power of 2, for page table space in memory. The amount of page table space that is allocated is based on the maximum memory setting in the partition’s profile. Memory is allocated in LMB size segments.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-11

Student Notebook

Memory usage (2 of 2) IBM Power Systems

• Where is all the memory? Check the Managed Systems property sheet.

Memory not currently assigned

If AMS is configured, shared memory pool will be part of assigned memory Reserved memory for hypervisor, PTE, TCE

Everything adds up: 27.50+18.75+1.75=48

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-10. Memory usage (2 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: Where did the memory go? You can check the current memory usage of a system by viewing the Memory tab in the managed systems property sheet as shown in the visual. Select the managed system name in the HMC System Management, click Properties from the menu, then click the Memory tab. • Installed: Displays the total number of memory units that are installed on your managed system. This number includes both active memory and inactive memory. • Deconfigured: Displays the total number of deconfigured memory units on your managed system. This number includes both memory that has been deconfigured by the system due to hardware failures and memory that has been manually deconfigured using the service processor. • Available: Displays the amount of memory (in megabytes) that is available for partition usage on the managed system. This memory is not currently assigned to any partition.

6-12 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

• Configurable: Displays the amount of memory (in megabytes) that can be configured on the managed system. This number includes memory that is currently assigned to partitions on the system. If huge page memory support is available on the managed system, the amount of configurable memory is reduced when huge page memory is requested and allocated. • Memory region size: Displays the size of the memory blocks that can be assigned to partitions. In logically partitioned systems, all physical system memory is subdivided into blocks of a uniform size, which can then be individually assigned to partitions. Total partition memory can be assigned in integer multiples of that size, either by editing partition profile definitions or by selecting dynamic logical partitioning operations. The default memory block size varies according to the amount of configurable memory in the system. • Assigned to partitions: Displays the current memory assigned to partitions. This number represents Configurable memory minus Available memory minus Reserved memory. • Reserved: This field displays the amount of memory that the managed system needs to manage the logical partitions on your managed system. This amount is calculated based on the number of logical partitions on your managed system and the resource amounts that you assign to each logical partition. • Active memory sharing support: Yes/no indicator displaying active memory sharing support on current server. Memory information can also be obtained using the following HMC command: lshwres -r mem -m managedsysname --level sys

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-13

Student Notebook

Processor resources IBM Power Systems

• Processor allocation: – Dedicated or shared processors – Increments can be in 0.01 processing units (for shared)

• For each partition, configure: – Minimum: • Partition will not start if this number is not available. • Partition can be decreased to this number if using dynamic LPAR.

– Desired: • Partition will use up to this number upon activation if available.

– Maximum: • Partition can be increased to this number if using dynamic LPAR.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-11. Processor resources

AN113.0

Notes: Processor allocation A dedicated processor can be assigned to only one active partition at a time. Shared processing units are accessed from a shared processor pool. Minimum resources are the resources that are required for a partition. If there are not enough resources to meet this required minimum then the partition will not start. The minimum setting is also the number of processors to which the partition can be reduced to dynamically. Desired resources are what you would like to have for normal operation of the partition. When you start the partition, the system will allocate the number of available processors up to the desired number. The maximum setting defines the largest number of processors you can assign to this partition. The HMC task for dynamic configuration of processors will not allow you to add more processors to a partition that is already at its maximum limit.

6-14 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

I/O resources IBM Power Systems

• A partition requires a minimum of: – One boot device in allocated I/O slot. – One network adapter in allocated I/O slot. – Other I/O adapters for storage and network access.

• I/O slots can be required or desired. • Allocation to partitions is by individual slots: – Multiple devices connected to a single SCSI adapter are allocated together.

• Empty slots can be allocated to a partition. – Useful if not able to allocate dynamically.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-12. I/O resources

AN113.0

Notes: Required versus desired The partition will start only if all of the required slots are available and it will attempt to assign those that are desired. Slots that are required cannot be dynamically removed or moved from the partition. You can allocate empty slots to partitions if you plan to add PCI adapters to the system at a later time. Mix of devices on a single SCSI adapter Be careful of the mix of devices that you attach to a single SCSI adapter because it is the adapter that is allocated to a partition (or more accurately, it is the slot that it is in). For example, if you had a single DVD-ROM drive on a system and it was connected to the same SCSI adapter as a partition’s boot disk, you could not then reallocate that adapter to another partition that might need to use that DVD-ROM device.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-15

Student Notebook

Virtual SCSI devices IBM Power Systems

• Virtual SCSI configurations allow a client LPAR to use the physical storage on a Virtual I/O Server partition. – Backing storage might be a logical volume, a physical volume, or an optical media drive. – Must install and configure Virtual I/O Server (VIOS) software.

• On the client, you need to know the virtual adapter ID that the server has set up for that client. The server configures a virtual SCSI server adapter using the HMC.

The backing storage is set up on the Virtual I/O Server command line.

Virtual I/O Server

Physical storage Adapter 14

The client configures a virtual SCSI client adapter using the HMC which points to a specific Virtual I/O Server and its virtual adapter ID.

Client LPAR (AIX or Linux)

Virtual device

Adapter 8

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-13. Virtual SCSI devices

AN113.0

Notes: Terminology Virtual I/O is the term used to describe the ability to share physical I/O resources between partitions. Backing storage is the term for the physical devices that will be used as virtual devices for client partitions. A backing storage device is associated with a specific virtual SCSI server adapter. More than one device can be associated with a single virtual SCSI server adapter. Virtual SCSI is a type of virtual device where a Virtual I/O Server is configured to allow other partitions to use its disk or optical devices. These devices do not need to be SCSI type devices; for example, the optical media drive is an IDE type device. The disks can be whole disks or logical volumes on the Virtual I/O Server. When the client views the devices from its operating system, it appears as an hdisk or a cd device. For example, if the Virtual I/O Server configures a logical volume named lv_client1, in the client’s operating system this device is an hdisk.

6-16 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Virtual Ethernet options IBM Power Systems

• Two choices for virtual Ethernet, both configured with the HMC: – Virtual Ethernet adapter: • Networking between multiple LPARs on same server. • Hypervisor acts as the Ethernet switch. • Virtual I/O Server can bridge the virtual Ethernet traffic to an external network using a physical adapter. – This configuration is called a shared Ethernet adapter (SEA).

– Integrated Virtual Ethernet adapter (IVE): • Also known as the host Ethernet adapter. • Physical adapter that can be shared by up to 16 or 32 partitions (depending on the model purchased). • Each partition configures a logical port associated with a physical port on the host Ethernet adapter. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-14. Virtual Ethernet options

AN113.0

Notes: Virtual Ethernet adapter Virtual Ethernet adapters can be configured in multiple partitions on the same server and these adapters appear as ent devices to the AIX operating system and eth devices to Linux. To connect this virtual Ethernet to an outside network, a bridge called a Shared Ethernet adapter can be configured in a Virtual I/O Server partition. Integrated Virtual Ethernet adapter This adapter, also known as the Host Ethernet Adapter, is a physical Ethernet adapter integrated into many POWER7 servers. It is considered virtual because the physical ports on this adapter can be shared by multiple partitions. A partition configures one of the logical ports on the adapter and the logical port appears as an ent device to AIX or as an eth device to Linux.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-17

Student Notebook

Create a logical partition: System state IBM Power Systems

• The managed system must be powered on and its status must be Operating or Standby.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-15. Create a logical partition: System state

AN113.0

Notes: The first step in creating partitions is to power on your managed system. You do this from the System Management > Servers Work pane on the HMC. Any of the managed system power on options will bring your system up to a state where partitions can be created.

6-18 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Create logical partition wizard IBM Power Systems

• Select a server in the work pane table; then click Configuration > Create Logical Partition > AIX or Linux.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-16. Create logical partition wizard

AN113.0

Notes: To access the Create Logical Partition menu, select the server name in the Work pane table (click the Select column). Select the Configuration task group from the tasks pad. Expand the task group then, select the task, and then click Create Logical partition > AIX or Linux. The task window opens. You can also use the context menu button (double right arrows) that is displayed next to the object name you have selected. Click the button and the task groups menu is displayed for that particular object. Click Configuration > Create Logical Partition > AIX or Linux.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-19

Student Notebook

Partition ID and name IBM Power Systems

• Enter a partition ID and name.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-17. Partition ID and name

AN113.0

Notes: After you specify the partition ID and name, click Next to proceed to the next wizard screen. Partition IDs The first screen in the Create Logical Partition wizard allows you to set the partition ID and the partition name. The partition ID will default to the next available number, but you can override it. The partition ID number must be a whole number that is between one and the total number of partitions that the system will support. When your partition has an operating system and is booted, you can view its partition ID and partition name with the AIX uname -L command or the lparstat -i command. For example: Partition name The partition name can be very long and contain spaces. If you plan to use the command line interface on the HMC, the partition names should be easy to type. Quotation marks will need to be used on the command line if a partition name contains spaces. 6-20 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Profile name IBM Power Systems

• Enter a partition profile name.

Check if this will be the only partition and it will use all of the resources on the server.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-18. Profile name

AN113.0

Notes: Partition profile name A partition must have at least one partition profile, which contains the resource configuration information. When you create a partition, you create the default profile. The default profile can be changed to a different profile later. The default profile is the one that is used when you activate a partition if you do not choose a different profile. Like the partition name, the profile name can be very long and contain spaces. If you plan to use the command line interface on the HMC, the partition names should be easy to type. Quotation marks will need to be used on the command line if a profile name contains spaces. Typically, profile names are descriptive of what is different between it and another profile. Use all the resources in the system check box You can set a partition profile so that, when it is activated, the logical partition uses all of the resources on the managed system. If you add additional resources to the managed

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-21

Student Notebook

system, and then activate such a partition profile, the logical partition automatically recognizes and uses the resources that you have added. Because all of the hardware (both required and desired) is assigned to this partition, no other partitions can be started when this partition is running. Likewise, the partition that uses all of the system resources cannot be started while other partitions are running.

6-22 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Set processor type IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-19. Set processor type

AN113.0

Notes: Set processor type The first question about processors to answer in the wizard program is whether the partition will use shared or dedicated processors. When you click Next to proceed to the next page, the actual page you see will depend on whether you specified shared or dedicated processors.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-23

Student Notebook

Configure dedicated processors IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-20. Configure dedicated processors

AN113.0

Notes: Dedicated processors Dedicated processors are allocated in whole numbers from one to the total number of available physical processor cores.

6-24 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Configure shared processors IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-21. Configure shared processors

AN113.0

Notes: Configure shared processors Configure the quantity of processing units for this partition. Uncapped option The Uncapped option represents whether you want the HMC to consider the partition capped or uncapped. Whether a partition is capped or uncapped, when it is activated it takes on a processor value equal to a number somewhere between the minimum and desired processing units, depending on what is available from the shared resource pool. However, if a partition is capped, it can gain processing power only through a DLPAR allocation and otherwise stays at the value given to it at time of activation. If the partition is uncapped, it can exceed the value set in Desired number of processing units (while it is running, these are referred to as the LPAR entitlement) from the shared processor pool that it needs. This is not seen from the HMC view of the partition, but you can check the value of processors owned by the partition from the operating system level with the appropriate commands. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-25

Student Notebook

Memory settings IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-22. Memory settings

AN113.0

Notes: The minimum, desired, and maximum settings are similar to their processor counterparts: • Minimum memory: Represents the absolute memory required to make the partition active. If the amount of memory specified under minimum is not available on the managed server then the partition cannot become active. • Desired memory: Specifies the amount of memory beyond the minimum that can be allocated to the partition. If the minimum is set at 256 MB and the desired is set at 4 GB, then the partition in question can become active with anywhere between 256 MB and 4 GB. • Maximum memory: Represents the absolute maximum amount of memory for this partition, and it can be a value greater than or equal to the number specified in Desired Memory memory. If set at the same amount as desired, then the partition is considered capped, and if this number is equal to the total amount of memory in the server then this partition is considered uncapped.

6-26 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Configure I/O slots IBM Power Systems

Select the slot first and then click the required or desired button.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-23. Configure I/O slots

AN113.0

Notes: Configuring physical I/O On the I/O window, you can select I/O resources for the partition to own.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-27

Student Notebook

Virtual I/O adapters setup IBM Power Systems

• Maximum virtual adapters value: – Must be greater than number of virtual adapters expected to be configured. – Cannot be changed dynamically.

Use the Actions menu to add virtual adapters.

Specify the maximum number of virtual adapters (default is 10 for AIX/Linux partition).

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-24. Virtual I/O adapters setup

AN113.0

Notes: Configuring virtual adapters On the Virtual Adapters screen, use the Actions menu to create a new virtual SCSI or virtual Ethernet adapter. This virtual Ethernet adapter is the virtual Ethernet in which the Hypervisor acts as the network switch for partitions on the same server. The next visual shows the screen for configuring the virtual SCSI adapter. Maximum number of virtual adapters By default, a new AIX or Linux partition will have the maximum number of virtual adapters set to ten. This can be increased on this screen. This maximum number cannot be increased dynamically while the partition is running, so be sure to increase this number if you will need more than eight additional virtual adapters. If you do need to increase this number later, you can make the change in the profile properties and re-activate the partition.

6-28 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Serial adapter There are two serial adapters to support the partition console connections. Do not delete these or make any additional serial adapters.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-29

Student Notebook

Logical Host Ethernet Adapter (1 of 3) IBM Power Systems

• Choose an HEA to define an LHEA.

Choose which physical port. Click Configure.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-25. Logical Host Ethernet Adapter (1 of 3)

AN113.0

Notes: Logical Host Ethernet adapters (LHEA) This LHEA is the integrated physical Ethernet adapter which can be shared with up 32 partitions. Each partition will configure a logical port on which is associated with a physical port. All partitions configured for the same physical port will share the bandwidth of that port. This adapter is also known as the Integrated Virtual Ethernet (IVE) adapter. Configuring a logical port After having selected the physical port, the next step is to configure a LHEA port for that particular logical partition by clicking Configure.

6-30 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Logical Host Ethernet Adapter (2 of 3) IBM Power Systems

Select a logical port that is unassigned.

Allow all VLAN IDs.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-26. Logical Host Ethernet Adapter (2 of 3)

AN113.0

Notes: Use this window to select the logical port to use for the physical port that you selected in the LHEA page. The logical partition will be able to connect to the physical port on the HEA using the logical port that you select here. You can also select VLANs in which the selected logical port can participate. The logical port does not need to participate in any VLANs. You can set the logical port to participate in all VLANs, or you can set the logical port to participate in up to 20 VLANs that you specify. After clicking OK, you will return to the screen shown in the last visual.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-31

Student Notebook

Logical Host Ethernet Adapter (3 of 3) IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-27. Logical Host Ethernet Adapter (3 of 3)

AN113.0

Notes: Once the Logical Host Ethernet Adapter port is configured, it appears in the LHEA table in the column Logical Port IDs associated with the physical port of the selected HEA. The ID numbers of the virtual LANs in which the logical port can participate are displayed in the Allowed VLAN IDs column.

6-32 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Host Channel Adapter IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-28. Host Channel Adapter

AN113.0

Notes: HCA Use this page to add Host Channel Adapter (HCA) resources to the partition profile. The HCA resources are assigned to the logical partition when you use the partition profile to activate the logical partition. If the selected HCA resources are not available, you cannot activate the logical partition using the partition profile. To configure HCA resources for this partition profile, select an HCA in the table and click Configure to enter the appropriate information.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-33

Student Notebook

Optional Settings IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-29. Optional Settings

AN113.0

Notes: Connection monitoring This determines if this partition will have its network connection with the HMC monitored by service tools. If the partition is monitored, if there is a connection failure, it will be logged in the service tools. Automatically start with the managed system If you want this partition to automatically start when you choose the managed system’s Partition Auto Start power on option, then select this check box. Enable redundant error path reporting Select this option to enable the reporting of server common hardware errors from this logical partition to the Hardware Management Console. The service processor is the primary path for reporting server common hardware errors to the HMC. Selecting this option allows you to set up redundant error reporting paths in addition to the error reporting path provided by the service processor.

6-34 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Boot modes You can set the default boot mode for this partition profile. When you activate a partition you can override the default boot mode. • Normal: This option uses the normal boot list stored in the partition NVRAM. • System Management Services (SMS): This option does not use the normal boot list, but instead stops at SMS upon activation of the partition. • DIAG_DEFAULT: This selection is similar to Power On Diagnostic Stored Boot List Profile (DIAG_STORED), except the system boots using the default boot list that is stored in the system firmware. This is normally used to try to boot diagnostics from the CD-ROM drive. This is the preferred way to run stand-alone diagnostics. This can also be used to boot from CD-ROM to install the operating system. • DIAG_STORED: This selection causes the system to perform a service mode boot using the service mode boot list saved on the managed system. If the system boots AIX from the disk drive and AIX diagnostics are loaded on the disk drive, AIX boots to the diagnostics menu. This is the preferred way to run online diagnostics. • OPEN_FIRMWARE: This profile is used by service personnel to obtain additional debug information. When this selection is enabled, the system boots to the Open Firmware prompt.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-35

Student Notebook

Check logical partition Profile Summary IBM Power Systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-30. Check logical partition Profile Summary

AN113.0

Notes: Summary The last page that displays when you create a partition is the Profile Summary page. Check over all of the configuration settings that you chose. You can click Back to fix anything, or click Finish to create the partition and its default profile. Additional partition profiles To create additional partition profiles, you can either copy an existing profile and edit it, or you can create a new one. When you create new additional profiles for a partition, you will see all of these screens again except the very first one where you set the partition ID.

6-36 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Editing a partition's configuration IBM Power Systems

• After a partition is created, you can edit its configuration from the partition properties or from the partition profile properties.

Manage Profiles screen: Select profile name and choose Actions > Edit.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-31. Editing a partition's configuration

AN113.0

Notes: Editing the partition properties Usually, a partition’s properties are viewed to see the partition’s current configuration. There are a few configuration options available in the partition properties. Editing the partition profile There are two reasons to edit a partition’s profile. First, you might need to change the configuration and second there are some additional configuration options only available in the profile after the partition has been created. The changes only take effect after the partition is shut down and activated again.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-37

Student Notebook

Additional configuration options IBM Power Systems

• Some additional options are only found in the partition profile properties.

BSR arrays Huge Page Memory

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-32. Additional configuration options

AN113.0

Notes: Barrier synchronization register (BSR) arrays The BSR provides a means to accomplish barrier synchronization between software tasks in a manner more efficient than utilizing standard memory based synchronization flags and algorithms. When the BSR capability is enabled, the managed system includes processors with BSR arrays and supports the use of the BSR arrays on the processors. Huge page memory Power Systems servers support 16 GB huge pages, which are intended for use in specialized high performance computing environments. The managed system must be powered off to be able to create a pool of 16 GB pages. Once the pool has been created, 16 GB pages can then be allocated to the profile of a partition.

6-38 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Checkpoint (1 of 2) IBM Power Systems

1. Match the terms minimum, desired, and maximum to the proper description: a. This is the upper limit of processors or memory that cannot be exceeded when using dynamic operations. b. This is the lower limit of processors or memory when using dynamic operations. c. This is the amount of processors or memory that a partition receives if there are more than enough resources on the system when the partition is activated (starts).

2. True or False: The amount of desired processors must always be greater than or equal to the amount of minimum processors. 3. What is the minimum amount of memory for an AIX partition? 4. True or False: Empty I/O slots can be allocated to partitions. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-33. Checkpoint (1 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-39

Student Notebook

Checkpoint (2 of 2) IBM Power Systems

5. What happens if the minimum (or required) amount of a resource is not available when a partition is activated? 6. How many processors is a partition allocated if, when it starts, it has a minimum of three processors, desires five processors, and four processors are currently available on the system? 7. What happens if a partition is currently running with its three minimum processors but it desires five processors and another processor becomes available after the partition is started? 8. What is the granularity of allocating processor resources when configuring partitions? 9. When incrementing the amount of memory for a partition profile, the minimum unit is how much? © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-34. Checkpoint (2 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes:

6-40 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Exercise: Configuring logical partitions IBM Power Systems

Unit exerc ise

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-35. Exercise: Configuring logical partitions

AN113.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

6-41

Student Notebook

Unit summary IBM Power Systems

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: • Describe the following partition concepts: – Minimum partition configuration – Maximum number of partitions – Partition IDs and naming conventions – Partition and system profiles

• Describe basic processor and memory configuration options • Define minimum, maximum, and desired settings for memory and processors • Describe I/O concepts and the required and desired settings • Use the Create Partition wizard to create a basic partition and a default profile • Edit a partition’s configuration © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-36. Unit summary

AN113.0

Notes: More summary information: • Partition concepts: - Minimum partition configuration • Processors, memory, I/O slots - Maximum number of partitions depends on model and amount of resources - Partition profiles contain resource configuration information - System profiles are lists of partitions and profiles to start in a particular order • Minimum, maximum, and desired settings for memory and processors • Required and desired settings for I/O slots • Create Partition wizard leads you through creating partitions and profiles

6-42 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Unit 7. Partition operations What this unit is about This unit describes the procedures for operations with partitions, such as activating, stopping, and backing up partition profile data. Also covered are ways to troubleshoot activation failures.

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Activate and shut down partitions • Modify, copy, and delete partition profiles • Create, modify, delete, and activate system profiles • Open and close terminal windows • Change partition availability priority • Back up and restore partition profile data • Troubleshoot partition activation errors

How you will check your progress Accountability: • Checkpoint questions • Machine exercise

References http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/systems/index.jsp  IBM System p and AIX Information Center

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 7. Partition operations

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-1

Student Notebook

Unit objectives IBM Power Systems

After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Activate and shut down partitions • Modify, copy, and delete partition profiles • Create, modify, delete, and activate system profiles • Open and close terminal windows • Change partition availability priority • Back up and restore partition profile data • Troubleshoot partition activation errors

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-1. Unit objectives

AN113.0

Notes:

7-2

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Web-based user interface: Systems Management IBM Power Systems

• Create, copy, delete, and back up system and partition profiles • Activate partitions

Managed systems

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-2. Web-based user interface: Systems Management

AN113.0

Notes: The Navigation pane in the left portion of the window, contains the primary navigation links for managing your system resources and the HMC. This pane contains the primary navigation links for managing your system resources such as the Systems Management. When Systems Management is selected, its contents, which might include servers, frames, and custom groups, are displayed in the Work pane. To view the partitions defined on a server, you can select it from the Navigation pane on in the Work pane. When a server is selected in the Navigation pane, the Work pane displays all logical partitions defined on the server. Functions in the Systems Management node The bullets in the visual list some common tasks that are performed when using the System Management node. You can create system and partition profiles, activate (start) partitions, shut down operating systems, power on and off the system, watch the status codes, and open virtual console windows. The state column displays the current state of the managed system. Possible values are: © Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 7. Partition operations

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-3

Student Notebook

• Operating: The managed system initialized and is operational. • Power off: The managed system is powered off. • Initializing: The managed system is powered on and is initializing. The initialization time might vary depending on the hardware and the partition configuration of the managed system. • Pending authentication: The managed system is waiting for the service processor password to be authenticated. • Failed authentication: The service processor password is not synchronized with the HMC password. • Error: The operating system or the hardware of the managed system is experiencing errors. • Error - Dump in Progress: The managed system encountered an error and is performing a system dump. • Error - Terminated: The managed system encountered an error and has performed a system dump. • On Demand Recovery: The anchor card (also known as the system VPD card) on this managed system was replaced. You must enter replacement activation codes for Capacity on Demand or Virtualization Engine system technologies. On/Off CoD requests must be restarted. • Powering Off: The managed system is powering off normally. • Standby: The managed system is powered on using the Power on standby option. It will stay in this state until a logical partition is activated. You can create and modify logical partitions while the managed system is in this state. • Incomplete: The HMC failed to get all of the necessary information from the managed system. Refresh the internal representation of the managed system on the HMC using the Rebuild task. The Rebuild operation does not disrupt the operation of the running server. • No Connection: The HMC is not connected or the handshake with the managed system failed. • Recovery: The save area in service processor is not synchronized with the HMC database. • Service Processor Failover In Progress: The primary service processor in the managed system is performing an administrative failover and transferring system management to the secondary service processor. This transfer is in progress. • Version Mismatch: This version of HMC is unable to manage the system. Update the HMC Licensed Internal Code.

7-4

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

HMC command to determine managed system state The HMC command to determine the managed system state is: lssysscfg -r sys -m managedsysname -F state --header

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 7. Partition operations

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-5

Student Notebook

Activating partitions IBM Power Systems

• To start a partition, you activate it. • When a partition is activated: – You choose which partition profile to use. – What happens depends on the partition profile configuration.

• Partitions can be activated by one of the following methods: – Activate a system profile. – Activate an individual partition. – Configure partitions to automatically activate when managed system is powered on. – Schedule an operation.

• Activations can be done either in the HMC interface or with the HMC chsysstate command. – For example: chsysstate -m msname -r lpar -o on -f profilename -n LPARname © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-3. Activating partitions

AN113.0

Notes: Activating partitions To activate a partition means to begin the process to boot its operating system. Partitions can be activated with a menu command in the HMC interface, at power on of the managed system, as a scheduled operation, or when a system profile is activated. A system profile is a named list of partitions and their profiles which are activated in the order in which they are listed. The managed system must be in the Standby or Operating state to activate a partition. Partition boot options One of the configuration options in partition profiles is the boot option. This can be set to different values depending on the type of operating environment (that is, AIX/Linux or  IBM i) for which the partition has been configured. For example, you could set the boot option to load the operating system or to stop at an open firmware prompt.

7-6

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Activate partitions with a system profile IBM Power Systems

• A system profile can be used to activate partitions either during system power on or after it is already on.

Select system profile name and click Activate. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-4. Activate partitions with a system profile

AN113.0

Notes: You can start multiple partitions with one command by using a system profile. Remember that a system profile is a named list of partitions and their profiles. All of the partitions in that system profile will be activated in the order that they are listed. The HMC does not wait until partitions’ operating systems are fully operational before activating the next partition in the system profile list. So if there are dependencies between partitions (such as with a Virtual I/O Server and its clients), you might need to start some partitions first manually or have multiple system profiles. You can use a system profile to start multiple partitions even if there are already partitions running. If a partition is already running, you will get a warning, but the partition will not be affected if a system profile attempts to activate it again. Activating a system profile after system is powered on 1. Select the system name object in the working pane; then use the context menu button or the Tasks pad to access the Manage System Profile window.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 7. Partition operations

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-7

Student Notebook

2. Select one system profile; then click Actions > Activate. This is illustrated on the visual. Activating a system profile during power on of the system When you power on the system, there are four power on options (this was covered in a previous unit): • System Profile • Partition Auto Start • Partition Standby • Hardware Discovery If you choose System Profile, you will be asked which system profile you want to use. This option will be unavailable to you until you create a system profile. HMC command for activating a system profile You can use the chsysstate command to activate a system profile. For example, this command activates the system profile with the name xyz. The managed system must be powered on first before executing this command. Replace managedsysname with the actual managed system name. chsysstate -m managedsysname -r sysprof -n xyz -o on

7-8

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Activating an individual partition IBM Power Systems

• Partition must be in the Not Activated state. Managed systems

List of LPARs

HMC command:

chsysstate -m MSname -r lpar -o on -n lparname -f profile © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-5. Activating an individual partition

AN113.0

Notes: Activating a partition To activate a partition using a profile, select the partition and choose Operations > Activate > Profile on the menu. Another dialog box will open which is shown in an upcoming visual. HMC commands for activating a partition The HMC command to activate a partition is shown below. Use the actual managed system name for MSname, the actual partition’s name for lparname and the actual partition profile name for profile. chsysstate -m MSname -r lpar -o on -n lparname -f profile Another useful option to chsysstate is the -b bootmode. Valid bootmode values are norm for normal, dd for diagnostic with default boot list, ds for diagnostic with stored boot list, of for Open Firmware OK prompt, or sms for System Management Services.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 7. Partition operations

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-9

Student Notebook

Partition operating states • Not Activated: The partition is ready to be activated. • Running: The partition has finished its boot routines. The operating system might be performing its own boot routines or is in its normal running state. • Not Available: This partition is not available for use. Logical partitions will be listed as Not Available if the system is powered off. • Shutting Down: The partition has been issued the Partition Shut Down command and is in the process of shutting down. • Open Firmware: The partition has been activated and started with the open firmware boot option. • Error: The last attempt to activate the partition failed. Fix the activation issue and use the Activate menu option to activate the partition.

7-10 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Activating with open terminal window IBM Power Systems

• Select the profile name and (optionally) select the terminal window checkbox.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-6. Activating with open terminal window

AN113.0

Notes: Activating a partition The dialog box shown in the visual above pops up after you select a partition profile and choose Activate on the menu. It verifies the correct partition name and has the profile already selected. You can choose whether to open the virtual terminal (console) window as part of the activation process. On this dialog box, check to make sure the correct profile name is selected and choose whether you want to open a console window when the partition starts. If you do, check the checkbox and then click OK. No errors will occur if you do not open a terminal window and you can open a terminal window later after the partition is already running. If there is a virtual console window already open for this partition, do not click the checkbox and it will use the same open window. The window might still be open because you just used it to shutdown the operating system.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 7. Partition operations

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-11

Student Notebook

Terminal window: Normal boot IBM Power Systems

Copy and paste from Edit menu.

Change font and text size with Font menu.

LPAR name and managed system name.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-7. Terminal window: Normal boot

AN113.0

Notes: This visual shows an example terminal window to a partition running the AIX V7.1 operating system.

7-12 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Activating with advanced options IBM Power Systems

• Click Advanced to choose override options.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-8. Activating with advanced options

AN113.0

Notes: Advanced options This is the box that pops up if you click the Advanced button shown in the previous visual. You can use this feature to override the keylock position (manual or normal) and boot mode settings in the partition profile configuration. The list seen in the Boot mode drop down varies depending on the operating system environment the partition is configured to use (AIX/Linux, IBM i, or Virtual I/O Server). The keylock position only has significance for IBM i.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 7. Partition operations

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-13

Student Notebook

Open or close a terminal window IBM Power Systems

• You can also open (or close) the terminal window when a partition is already running.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-9. Open or close a terminal window

AN113.0

Notes: Virtual console windows from the HMC GUI You can open an LPAR’s console from the HMC GUI or from the HMC command line. Only one console can be open to an LPAR at a time. Select an LPAR and run the Console Window > Open Terminal Window task. There are two ways to close a virtual terminal: • The preferred, usual method of closing a terminal window on a Windows PC is to simply close the window. This closes the connection. • You might need to force a virtual terminal window to close by selecting the partition and running the Console Window > Close Terminal Connection task. Use this procedure when the virtual terminal window is open on another HMC (or remotely from a browser) and you want to close that session.

7-14 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

HMC commands to open and close a terminal session You can open a virtual terminal session to a partition after it is activated, with the following HMC command: mkvterm -m managedsysname -p partitionname Alternatively, you can use the partition ID instead of the partition name as shown in the following example. You can also use the HMC vtmenu command which provides a convenient menu of the partitions on the managed system. Simply select the partition from the menu to open its console window. To close the session, exit out of the shell and type ~. (tilde dot) at the login prompt and answer y (yes) to terminate the session. Here is an example mkvterm command and session where managedsysname is the actual managed system name and lparID is the actual partition ID number. mkvterm –m managedsysname --id lparID AIX Version 7 Console login: ~. Terminate session? [y/n] Use the rmvterm command to close a different virtual terminal session (that is perhaps on the HMC or another remote workstation): rmvterm -m managedsysname -p partitionname

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 7. Partition operations

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-15

Student Notebook

Stopping a partition IBM Power Systems

• Two ways to stop a partition cleanly: – Log in to the operating system and use the proper shut down command. – Use the HMC. Either use the Operation menu and then select Shut Down or by use the chsysstate command.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-10. Stopping a partition

AN113.0

Notes: Stopping a partition When you shut down the operating system in the partition, this stops the partition. The partition state returns to the Not Activated state. You can shut down a partition by logging in and executing the appropriate operating system shut down command. You can also use the Shut Down menu option as shown in the visual above. Automatic Power Off There is a setting in the managed system properties which will power off the managed system if you stop the last partition on the system. By default, this is not enabled. HMC command You can also use the chsysstate HMC command to shut down the operating system: chsysstate -m managedsysname -o shutdown -r lpar -n lparname --immed

7-16 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Partition shutdown options IBM Power Systems

Shut down the logical partition as quickly as possible, without notifying the logical partitions. Network connection between LPAR and HMC needed for OS options. AIX shutdown command is run in the LPAR.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-11. Partition shutdown options

AN113.0

Notes: Choose from the following shutdown options: • Delayed: The HMC shuts down the logical partition using the delayed power-off sequence. This allows the logical partition time to end jobs and write data to disks. If the logical partition is unable to shut down within the predetermined amount of time, it will end abnormally and the next restart might be longer than normal. • Immediate: The HMC shuts down the logical partition immediately. The HMC ends all active jobs immediately. The programs running in those jobs are not allowed to perform any job cleanup. This option might cause undesirable results if data has been partially updated. Use this option only after a controlled shutdown has been unsuccessfully attempted. • Operating System: The HMC shuts down the logical partition normally by issuing a shutdown command to the logical partition. During this operation, the logical partition performs any necessary shutdown activities. This option is only available for AIX logical partitions.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 7. Partition operations

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-17

Student Notebook

• Operating System Immediate: The HMC shuts down the logical partition immediately by issuing a shutdown -F command to the logical partition. During this operation, the logical partition bypasses messages to other users and other shutdown activities. This option is only available for AIX logical partitions.

7-18 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Create a system profile (1 of 2) IBM Power Systems

• System profile is a list of partitions and profiles used to activate partitions or validate resource allocations to avoid contention. • To create a system profile: – Select the managed system name in the server table view. – Choose Configuration -> Manage System Profiles from the menu. – Then from the Actions menu, choose New.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-12. Create a system profile (1 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: System profiles Recall that a system profile is a named set of partition profiles. When you activate a system profile, all of the partition profiles that belong to it are activated. The intent of a system profile is that it allows you to activate your entire system at once rather than having to manually activate each partition. System profiles might be named after the types of system loads (such as normal or high performance) or the name might refer to a time period (such as weekday or end-of-month). Create a system profile To create a system profile, select the managed system name or the System Profiles folder name, right-click, and choose Configuration > Manage System Profiles on the menu. From the Actions menu, choose New. A dialog box will pop up that will allow you to select the partition profiles that should belong to this system profile. This dialog box is shown in the next visual.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 7. Partition operations

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-19

Student Notebook

Create a system profile (2 of 2) IBM Power Systems

Select Select partition partition profile profile names names on on the the left left and and click Add >>. click Add >>. Order Order of of LPARs LPARs matters matters in a system in a system profile. profile.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-13. Create a system profile (2 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: System profiles The system profile name must be unique for all system profiles on the managed system. To add a partition and its profile, click the expand icons in the first panel to expand the output. Select partition profiles on the left and use the Add>> button to add the profiles to the system profile list. To remove partition profiles from the list, select the partition and profile names on the right and use the Manage Profiles

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-15. Change the default partition profile

AN113.0

Notes: Default profile When you activate a partition and do not specify a profile name, the system highlights the default profile name by default. Every partition must have one default partition profile. You cannot delete the default partition profile unless you first designate another profile as the default profile for that partition. Change the default partition profile The first partition profile you create for a partition will initially be its default partition profile. To change the default partition profile, select the partition name and choose Change Default Profile from the tasks list. A dialog box will appear with the list of partition profile names. Choose the partition profile you want as the new default profile for this partition.

7-22 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Managing partition profiles IBM Power Systems

• Operations with partition profiles from the Configuration > Manage Profiles task: – Create additional profiles, edit existing profiles, copy profiles (within one partition), delete, and activate. – Cannot delete the last activated profile if the partition is still running. Actions menu

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-16. Managing partition profiles

AN113.0

Notes: Operations to managing partition profiles: • Backup: Reads the profile data and writes it to a backup file on the HMC. • Restore: Reads the profile data from the previously backed-up file on the HMC and loads this data to the NVRAM on the managed system. • Initialize: Initializes the profile data on the HMC and the NVRAM on the managed system. • Remove: Removes the previously backed-up file on the HMC.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 7. Partition operations

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-23

Student Notebook

Save configuration in a partition profile IBM Power Systems

• Create a new profile based on the current configuration of a running partition.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-17. Save configuration in a partition profile

AN113.0

Notes: Saving the current configuration Over time, you might make dynamic changes to a running partition. When you make dynamic changes, the partition profile does not automatically get updated. You would need to manually alter the existing partition profile if you want the change to be part of the profile in preparation for the next time the partition is activated. Another way to do this is to save a new profile based on the current running configuration. Use the Save Current Configuration task to do this. After running the task, a popup window will ask for a new profile name.

7-24 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Delete a partition IBM Power Systems

• Delete a partition: – Deletes all of its partition profiles. – Partition cannot be running.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-18. Delete a partition

AN113.0

Notes: Things to remember when deleting partitions • • • •

Deleting a partition deletes all of its partition profiles. You cannot delete an active partition. To delete a partition, the managed system must be powered on. The partition is also deleted from all system profiles automatically.

Delete a partition Select the partition name and choose Operations > Delete from the tasks menu.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 7. Partition operations

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-25

Student Notebook

Backing up partition profile data IBM Power Systems

• Backup partition profile data: – Backs up partition and system profile configuration data. – Creates a backup file on the HMC hard disk drive. – You are prompted for a backup file name. – LPAR information kept by LPAR ID number (not name).

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-19. Backing up partition profile data

AN113.0

Notes: Partition data backup files on the HMCs The Configuration > Managed Partition Data > Backup task will create a backup file on the HMC’s hard disk drive of all the partitions’ profile information and the system profile information. The data is saved as a file on the HMC in the /var/hsc/profiles/SN directory where SN is the serial number of the managed system. The HMC automatically saves profile information in a backup file called backupFile. You will see this file if you choose the Restore option. This backupFile is updated each time you make a profile configuration change and is useful only for holding the most up-to-date configuration. Initialize: This option removes all partitions and profiles! (You will wish you had a backup file if you ever accidently choose this task.)

7-26 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Restoring partition profile data IBM Power Systems

• Restore partition profile data: – Priority is used when there is an LPAR ID that is identical on the server and in the backup file. Backup files

Full only available if all partitions are Not Activated

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-20. Restoring partition profile data

AN113.0

Notes: Restore options A Full restore restores all profile data from the backup file. Profile modifications performed after the selected backup file was created will be lost. This restore option will not work if any partitions are running. Backup priority and managed system priority: These two options both merge the backup data with the recent profile activity on the HMC. In this way, if you accidently remove a partition, a partition profile, or a system profile, you can restore the information from your latest backup file. Partitions might be running when you perform this restore. For example, if you delete a partition’s profile and want to restore it, you can perform a restore while the partition is still running. With both of these options, you cannot choose what you want to restore; all changes that are different will be restored (except for partition profiles which are currently being used). The priorities tell the HMC which copy of data has priority when the list of partitions is the same: the backup copy or the current HMC version (for the managed system).

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 7. Partition operations

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-27

Student Notebook

Managing backup files IBM Power Systems

• Delete backup files that you no longer need: – Select the managed system name, choose Configuration > Manage Partition Data > Delete. – Select file name and click OK.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-21. Managing backup files

AN113.0

Notes: Deleting backup files Periodically you should prune the list of backup files. In fact, just like other computer systems, you should create a backup policy. For example, this policy might be to perform a weekly backup, keep backup files for 4 weeks, and after each backup is successful, the oldest backup file is removed. Or, you might want to just backup the profile data every time a change is made. The problem with this policy is that you might be in a hurry and forget this crucial step. These backup files are fairly small and the HMC hard disk drive is adequate to hold many backup files. However, you still might want to remove backup files after awhile.

7-28 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Backup and restore from the HMC CLI IBM Power Systems

• Backup and restores of profile data can be done from the HMC CLI. – Media can be the HMC hard drive, a USB flash drive, writeable DVD, USB diskette drive, or internal diskette drive (if available). • Listing backup files from HMC CLI: ls -l /var/hsc/profiles/105* total 900 -rw-rw-r-- 1 ccfw ccfw 225280 drwxrwxr-x 2 ccfw ccfw 4096 -rw-rw-r-- 1 ccfw ccfw 225280 -rw-rw-r-- 1 ccfw ccfw 225280

2011-02-18 2011-02-18 2011-02-18 2011-02-18

11:31 11:39 11:21 11:38

backupFile directory New332withLPAR3 Test

• Backup profile data: – List out /media directory to see available devices. – Example backup command: bkprofdata -m -f /media/cdrom/Mybackup • Restore profile data example: rstprofdata -m -l # -f /media/cdrom/Mybackup 1=full, 2=backup priority, 3=managed system priority, 4=initialize © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-22. Backup and restore from the HMC CLI

AN113.0

Notes: Backup and restore from the HMC command line In the bkprofdata command, if no directory is specified in -f argument, the file is created in /var/hsc/profiles/SN#/* where SN# is the serial number of the server. List out the /media directory to see the available mount points: hscroot@hmc> ls /media cdrom floppy For USB devices, plug them in first, then list out the /media directory.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 7. Partition operations

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-29

Student Notebook

Scheduling operations (1 of 4) IBM Power Systems

• Operations can be scheduled based on date and time: – Once or recurring

• From Schedule Operations task, use Options > New menu item to create a new scheduled operation. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-23. Scheduling operations (1 of 4)

AN113.0

Notes: Scheduling operations There are different types of operations that can be scheduled depending on the type of object that is selected first. For example, if you select the server, then operations such as server power on or off operations can be scheduled, a system profile can be activated, or partition data can be backed up. For a partition, operations such as activation, DLPAR operations, and shutdown can be scheduled. In addition, you can schedule operations specific to the HMC if you access the Schedule Operations task from the HMC Management application.

7-30 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Scheduling operations (2 of 4) IBM Power Systems

• Available operations for an LPAR:

• Specify date and time:

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-24. Scheduling operations (2 of 4)

AN113.0

Notes: Add a scheduled operation Once you choose Options > New from the menu, a window will pop up with a list of available operations. Choose one and click OK. Date and Time tab Set up the date and time of the operation. If the operation cannot be performed at that exact date and time, then the time window will be used to determine if the operation should be performed or cancelled. For example, if the operation was supposed to happen at 1:00 AM and the partition was in the middle of a restart, and the time window was set to 30 minutes, then the operation can start if the partition is ready by 1:30 AM. Notice the three tabs in the visual above. If the operation needs to repeat, click the Repeat tab to configure a repeated scheduled operation. The Options tab is where you specify any specifics for the operation.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 7. Partition operations

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-31

Student Notebook

Scheduling operations (3 of 4) IBM Power Systems

• Recurring operations:

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-25. Scheduling operations (3 of 4)

AN113.0

Notes: Repeat tab The Repeat tab is used to configure repeating scheduled operations. For example, you might want to move 2.0 processing units from one partition to another at midnight every night and then move them back at 7AM. Click the Set up a repeated scheduled operation, then specify the days of the week and the other options. The Interval field is a required field and the maximum is 26 weeks. This is the number of weeks to elapse before performing the scheduled operation again on each selected day. For example, if you want the operation to happen every other week, enter a 2 for the number of weeks in the Interval field. The Repetitions field is also a required field and the maximum is 100 or you have the choice of checking the Repeat indefinitely box.

7-32 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Scheduling operations (4 of 4) IBM Power Systems

• Specifics for operation:

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-26. Scheduling operations (4 of 4)

AN113.0

Notes: Options tab The Options tab will change depending on the operation being configured. The example in the visual above is a dynamic reconfiguration operation so it asks for specific resource and destination information for that operation.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 7. Partition operations

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-33

Student Notebook

Troubleshooting activation failures (1 of 3) IBM Power Systems

• Partition activation failures are typically the result of not enough resources to meet the minimum or required settings. • Read the error message, check your documentation and the managed system properties to figure out why. • Keep your worksheets up to date!

Example Failure – Only first conflict is shown

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-27. Troubleshooting activation failures (1 of 3)

AN113.0

Notes: Typical failures If there is a partition activation failure, it is probably because you attempted to start more resources than you have available. Assuming that you did not make a calculation error when figuring how many processors or how much memory to configure, there must be another reason for the error. Managed system properties You can select the name of the managed system in the server table view and choose Properties to see what resources are allocated to which partitions.

7-34 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Troubleshooting activation failures (2 of 3) IBM Power Systems

• Not enough processor or memory resources to meet minimum requirement: – A partition will attempt to allocate up to its desired amount: • Desired amounts for partitions too high? • Partition activation order might be a factor.

– Maximum memory might be set too high so that memory for page tables is over-configured. – Do not forget to plan for hypervisor memory needs. • Leave a little extra free memory especially if you expect to create more virtual adapters or use more IVE logical Ethernet ports.

• I/O slot in required list is not available: – Is it configured in a running partition?

• Cannot find boot device: – This is technically not an activation failure, but it still prevents the operating system from booting. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-28. Troubleshooting activation failures (2 of 3)

AN113.0

Notes: Activation errors Check your documentation and the managed system properties to figure out why you are attempting to allocate more processors or memory than the managed system has. Perhaps the partitions that started or their profiles were not the ones you expected or when the partitions started they came up in a different order, and all of the partitions with high desired numbers for processors grabbed too many of them. Cannot find boot device Technically, by the time the partition discovers it cannot find its boot device, it has already activated successfully. However, this scenario is included here because it is another common reason that a partition cannot fully start up. If you activate partitions with an open terminal window, you will be able to monitor the partition starting up. The partition will stop and display error information in the terminal window. From the HMC, it looks like the partition has activated normally (which, technically it has).

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 7. Partition operations

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-35

Student Notebook

Troubleshooting activation failures (3 of 3) IBM Power Systems

• Actions to take: – Read any error messages. – Use managed system properties or HMC commands to check system resources. – Use the System Profile Validate menu option to discover discrepancies. – Use DLPAR to free up additional resources. – Reduce minimum setting for partition you are trying to activate. – Reconfigure partition profiles and update documentation (so this does not happen next time).

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-29. Troubleshooting activation failures (3 of 3)

AN113.0

Notes: Use the Validate option for the system profile One technique you can use to avoid activation failures related to over-configuration is to create a system profile with a list of all of the partitions and their profiles that you want to run simultaneously. Select the system profile name and use the Validate menu option. This will report any discrepancies in resource allocations.

7-36 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Checkpoint (1 of 2) IBM Power Systems

1. How can you stop a partition? 2. What states must the managed system be in to create partitions? 3. True or False: The last partition profile you create for a partition is automatically its default profile. 4. When you modify a partition profile's configuration, what must you do to apply the new configuration to an active partition? 5. True or False: If you delete a partition, you delete all of its partition profiles. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-30. Checkpoint (1 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 7. Partition operations

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-37

Student Notebook

Checkpoint (2 of 2) IBM Power Systems

6. List two things you can do if a partition will not activate. 7. Match the partition states to their definitions. States: Not activated, shutting down, running, not available a. __________The partition is in the process of stopping. b. __________The partition has been successfully activated. c. __________The partition is not running but is available to be activated. d. __________The system is in a state that prevents the partition from being activated (such as the managed system is powered off).

8. True or False: When activating a partition, you must use the Open Terminal Window option.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-31. Checkpoint (2 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes:

7-38 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Exercise: Partition operations IBM Power Systems

Unit exerc ise

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-32. Exercise: Partition operations

AN113.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 7. Partition operations

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

7-39

Student Notebook

Unit summary IBM Power Systems

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: • Activate and shut down partitions • Modify, copy, and delete partition profiles • Create, modify, delete, and activate system profiles • Open and close terminal windows • Change partition availability priority • Back up and restore partition profile data • Troubleshoot partition activation errors

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-33. Unit summary

AN113.0

Notes: More summary information: • Activation options for partitions - Manually, system profile, automated, HMC chsysstate command • Partition states - Not Activated, Starting, Running, Error, Not Available • Partition profiles can be modified, copied, deleted, backed up, restored, and initialized - Change default profiles • System profiles - Are lists of partitions and a selected profile - Can be used during power on or after the managed system is operating • Partition console windows - Can be opened or closed, and accessed from HMC command line • Partition activation errors are usually caused by an attempt to use resources that are already in use

7-40 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Unit 8. Dynamic LPAR infrastructure What this unit is about This unit describes the procedures for performing dynamic resource allocations on partitions. Also covered is the DLPAR troubleshooting.

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • List the system requirements for dynamic logical partitioning (DLPAR) • Dynamically remove, add, and move processors, memory, and I/O slots to and from partitions • Perform operating system operations necessary to dynamically add and remove I/O slots • Use HMC commands to perform DLPAR operations and list hardware resources • Schedule DLPAR operations • Reinitialize RMC configuration • Troubleshoot DLPAR operation errors

How you will check your progress Accountability: • Checkpoint questions • Machine exercises

References http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/systems/index.jsp  IBM System p and AIX Information Center SG24-7940

PowerVM virtualization on IBM system p: Introduction and Configuration

SG24-6615

A Practical Guide for Resource Monitoring and Control (RMC)

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 8. Dynamic LPAR infrastructure

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-1

Student Notebook

Unit objectives IBM Power Systems

After completing this unit, you should be able to: • List the system requirements for dynamic logical partitioning (DLPAR) • Dynamically remove, add, and move processors, memory, and I/O slots to and from partitions • Perform operating system operations necessary to dynamically add and remove I/O slots • Use HMC commands to perform DLPAR operations and list hardware resources • Schedule DLPAR operations • Reinitialize RMC configuration • Troubleshoot DLPAR operation errors © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-1. Unit objectives

AN113.0

Notes: In this unit, we will look at both performing partition dynamic resource allocation and troubleshooting potential problems.

8-2

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Dynamic logical partitioning IBM Power Systems

• Dynamic logical partitioning (DLPAR) is the ability to add, remove, and move resources without reactivation of a partition: – Processor, memory, and I/O allocation changes. • Includes virtual adapters and IVE logical ports.

– Dynamic CUoD (processors and memory).

• Operating system support: – AIX V5.2 and up support all DLPAR operations. – RHEL for POWER V3 does not support DLPAR. – SLES 9 and up, and RHEL for POWER V4 and up support processor and I/O slot DLPAR.

• Applications might or might not be DLPAR-aware. • Network connection between the HMC and the partition must be available. • DLPAR operations can be done manually from the HMC or can be scheduled at a certain date and time. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-2. Dynamic logical partitioning

AN113.0

Notes: Dynamic Logical Partitioning Dynamic means that we can add, move, or remove resources without having to reactivate the partition. So if there are partitions that need more or can do with fewer resources, you can dynamically move the resources between partitions within the managed system without shutting down the partitions. Both the source and the destination partitions must support the dynamic partitioning operation.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 8. Dynamic LPAR infrastructure

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-3

Student Notebook

DLPAR operations overview IBM Power Systems

• Processors and memory: – Quantities are bound by the maximum and minimum partition profile settings. – Can change virtual processor and uncapped/capped settings. – CUoD processors and memory can be added dynamically.

• I/O slots: – Required slots cannot be dynamically removed. • Can change the required setting dynamically by modifying the active profile.

– Can add or remove virtual I/O adapters and IVE logical ports.

• Dynamic operations do not change the profiles: – Update the partition profile to make changes permanent. – Auto start power on option uses a partition’s last configuration, not a partition profile configuration.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-3. DLPAR operations overview

AN113.0

Notes: DLPAR and resource configurations Recall that there is a maximum and a minimum configuration option for processors and memory. You cannot exceed these boundaries when performing dynamic reallocation operations. For example, you can continue to remove processors from an active partition until the total number of processors in use is equal to the minimum amount. The limits in use are those in the active partition profile. For I/O slots, you cannot remove any slot that is required in the active partition profile. You also cannot remove any slot that contains an adapter that connects to a device that is in use. If an I/O slot is on the required list, it cannot be dynamically removed from the partition. The slot can be moved from the required list to the desired list in the active partition profile and then it can be dynamically removed.

8-4

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

How DLPAR works IBM Power Systems

1 HMC HMC command 2 3

3 Partition B

Partition A

Hypervisor 4 © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-4. How DLPAR works

AN113.0

Notes: The visual above illustrates how a dynamic move operation works. 1. The DLPAR request originates at the HMC. 2. The request is made over the network to the POWER Hypervisor. 3. Partition A and Partition B communicate with the HMC about the DLPAR operation through a process running on both partitions. 4. The POWER Hypervisor makes the resource allocation change. As you can see in the visual above, DLPAR operations are dependent on a functioning network between the HMC and the managed system, and between the HMC and the partitions. If the network is down either between the HMC and the managed system or between the partitions and the HMC, or if there are problems with routing, then DLPAR operations cannot occur.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 8. Dynamic LPAR infrastructure

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-5

Student Notebook

DLPAR operations IBM Power Systems

• Select the partition, then choose the type of resource and operation.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-5. DLPAR operations

AN113.0

Notes: Dynamic Logical Partitioning menu option The visual on this page shows how to begin a dynamic reallocation operation. Select the running partition and access the Dynamic Logical Partitioning menu where you can pick the type of resource and the operation to perform. Which partition you initially select will depend on the dynamic operation that you want to perform. For an add operation, choose the destination partition. For remove and move operations, select the source partition.

8-6

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Dedicated processor operation IBM Power Systems

• Add or remove operation: – Enter final desired amount. What is available? Is it a valid operation? Enter amount How long are you willing to wait?

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-6. Dedicated processor operation

AN113.0

Notes: Adding processors In the visual above, the “Available system processors: 0” line tells us that the managed system has no free processors so an add operation is impossible. You can add up to the maximum processors for the partition specified in the active partition profile. Note that the screen in the visual above tells you what this number is. Look at the Maximum column. Moving or removing processors When you move or remove processors, you initially select the source partition and then start the dynamic reallocation operation. You indicate the destination partition for a move operation in the pop-up window. You can remove processors down to the minimum setting for processors in the active partition profile.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 8. Dynamic LPAR infrastructure

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-7

Student Notebook

Shared processing units operation IBM Power Systems

What's available?

Is it a valid operation?

Enter quantities Capped/ uncapped and weight

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-7. Shared processing units operation

AN113.0

Notes: Share processor options You can alter the processing units, the uncapped/capped status, the uncapped weight value, and the virtual processor quantity from this screen. Timeout setting This is the amount of time that the HMC has to complete this operation. If it does not complete the operation within this amount of time, the operation will fail. The timeout setting by default is 5 which means that the HMC will wait 5 minutes for a DLPAR operation to finish.

8-8

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Move memory operation IBM Power Systems

Is it a valid operation? Enter quantity to move Move to which partition? Is it a valid operation?

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-8. Move memory operation

AN113.0

Notes: Moving memory In the example shown in the visual above, 256 MB of memory is being moved from the LPAR3 partition (shown in the window title) to the LPAR2 partition. The smallest unit that can be moved is the LMB size for the system. Moving processors works the same way If this were the screen to move processors, similar information would be shown. You would see the maximum and minimum settings for processing units (or dedicated processors) and virtual processors, and you would need to specify the destination partition.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 8. Dynamic LPAR infrastructure

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-9

Student Notebook

Add I/O slots operation IBM Power Systems

• Select the adapter(s).

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-9. Add I/O slots operation

AN113.0

Notes: Dynamically adding I/O slots The visual above shows an example of adding a free I/O slot to a running partition. You get to this window by selecting the partition name, then choosing from the menu: Dynamic Logical Partitioning, Physical Adapter Resources, and Add. A free I/O slot is one that does not belong to another running partition. Only slots that are currently not assigned to other running partitions will appear in this list. Simply select the I/O slots you want, then click the OK button.

8-10 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

AIX commands for I/O operations IBM Power Systems

• After adding slots with adapters from the HMC: – Must run cfgmgr in the AIX destination partition for it to discover the newly added devices. – Use lsdev –C in AIX to list devices.

• When removing I/O slots: – Use rmdev to remove the devices from the source partition. – Cannot remove: • Slots that are listed as required in the active partition profile. • Slots with devices that have not been removed in AIX. – Can change the required designation to desired in the active profile.

• When moving I/O slots, it is really a remove operation followed by an add operation: – Do not forget to run rmdev in source partition and cfgmgr in destination partition.

• In Linux, devices are automatically configured when added, and automatically deconfigured when removed. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-10. AIX commands for I/O operations

AN113.0

Notes: Removing I/O devices • First log in to the partition and remove the devices from the partition using the rmdev AIX command. You must remove all of the devices associated with that I/O slot in the order of the children up to the parent. • After devices are gone, then dynamically remove the I/O slots from the partition using the HMC. If you are moving slots, do everything for a remove, then perform the DLPAR move operation, and then run the cfgmgr command in the destination AIX partition. You do not need to run commands similar to cfgmgr or rmdev in Linux because devices are automatically configured and deconfigured by Linux kernel units.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 8. Dynamic LPAR infrastructure

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-11

Student Notebook

Removing I/O slots in AIX (1 of 2) IBM Power Systems

• Removing (or moving) slots: – Must rmdev –l all the devices in AIX that are in use. – For PCI devices, you remove all the way up to the PCI slot device. – Use the -d option for rmdev to remove entries in ODM and prevent left over Defined devices.

• Example: Remove a CD-ROM drive on a PCI adapter: – What other devices are connected via the slot?

• Might have other devices such as tape drives. • Must rmdev peer devices (tape drive, and so on), the bus, and the PCI slot device. PCI slot device

Bus

CD-ROM drive

Remove devices recursively, or manually from the bottom up

Tape drive

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-11. Removing I/O slots in AIX (1 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: If you want to move an I/O slot from one partition to another, it is probably because there is an adapter in that slot that you want to be part of another partition. That adapter might have devices (such as tape drives) and it might even have multiple buses. The devices such as tape drives, the buses, and the PCI slot itself must all be removed in AIX before you can move them to another partition using the HMC GUI or command line. The HMC software will not move I/O slots that have devices that are in use. You remove these devices from AIX by using the rmdev -l XXX where XXX represents the device name. For example, rmdev -l cd0 will remove the cd0 device. The trick is figuring out the list of devices to remove. This process is shown on the next visual.

8-12 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Removing I/O slots in AIX (2 of 2) IBM Power Systems

• First, find out which devices need to be removed: – In the LPAR, find out the device’s parent, the PCI device, and the slot in use:

# lsdev -Cl cd0 -F parent ide0 # lsslot -c slot –l ide0 U787F.001.DPM166X-P1-T12

Logical I/O Slot

pci2 ide0

– Or, attempt the DLPAR operation and read the error which lists all of the devices that need to be removed.

• Then, remove the PCI device and all of the devices belonging it: # rmdev -l pci2 -R cd0 Defined ide0 Defined pci2 Defined

• IVE logical ports: – If you are removing the second IVE logical port, simply remove the ent, en, and et devices/interfaces. – If you are removing the last IVE logical port, also remove the lhea device. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-12. Removing I/O slots in AIX (2 of 2)

AN113.0

Notes: Removing devices individually If you want to remove the devices individually, rather than with the -R (recursive) option, be sure to execute the commands so that you remove the devices from the bottom up. For example: # rmdev -l cd0 # rmdev -l ide0 # rmdev -l pci2

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 8. Dynamic LPAR infrastructure

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-13

Student Notebook

Remove I/O slots operation IBM Power Systems

• Select the slot(s) and click OK to remove or, choose a destination partition to move the slot.

If this is a move operation, select destination partition.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-13. Remove I/O slots operation

AN113.0

Notes: Removing and moving I/O slots The visual above shows the HMC Dynamic Logical Partitioning > Physical Adapter > Move or Remove task. The window shows you the slots that are available to be removed. Slots that can be moved or removed are those that are not listed as required in the partition profile, or slots that have been added from a previous dynamic add operation. The previous couple of visuals illustrated how you would remove the necessary devices from the operating system. Now that the proper devices have been removed in AIX, you can remove the I/O slot using the HMC application. Beware that the slots will show up in the adapters window whether you have performed the appropriate AIX rmdev operations.

8-14 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

DLPAR status (1 of 4) IBM Power Systems

• When the DLPAR operation is successful, the window disappears and you will see any new information reflected in the LPAR table view.

• If the operation takes some time, you might see a working window.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-14. DLPAR status (1 of 4)

AN113.0

Notes: Working window This visual shows the result of a dynamic reallocation operation. You can see the new resource amount in the LPAR table view. Sometimes you will see a Working window if the operation takes some time to complete. If you do not see a failure message, then the operation was a success.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 8. Dynamic LPAR infrastructure

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-15

Student Notebook

DLPAR status (2 of 4) IBM Power Systems

• When the DLPAR operation is not successful, the error might appear in the operation window.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-15. DLPAR status (2 of 4)

AN113.0

Notes: This visual shows one example of what might happen when a dynamic operation fails. The error should be descriptive so you can fix the problem, and try the operation again. Example error The example error in the visual above shows what will happen if you attempt to allocate a quantity of processing resources for the assigned value that is higher than the maximum value.

8-16 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

DLPAR status (3 of 4) IBM Power Systems

• Or, the error might appear in a pop up window: – Trying to allocate more resources than are available:

– Increasing processing units without also increasing virtual processors: • Minimum VP setting is the next higher whole number as compared to processing units quantity.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-16. DLPAR status (3 of 4)

AN113.0

Notes: DLPAR error example The visual above shows two errors that you might see in pop-up windows. The first error in the visual above says you are trying to add more resources than are available on the system. The second error says that you tried to add processing units in a quantity higher than the number of virtual processors allows. The minimum virtual processor quantity is the next higher whole number in relation to the processing units number.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 8. Dynamic LPAR infrastructure

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-17

Student Notebook

DLPAR status (4 of 4) IBM Power Systems

• DLPAR errors might be the result of networking or daemon errors.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-17. DLPAR status (4 of 4)

AN113.0

Notes: Networking errors Recall that partitions must have a network connection to their HMC to perform DLPAR operations. A simple ping should tell you if this is the issue. The error shown above could be a network error or a problem with the RMC daemons. The problem could be on the LPAR, on the HMC, or somewhere in between. RMC errors If a ping works between the LPAR and its HMC, then check the RMC daemons that are necessary for DLPAR operations. The next page discusses how to view the daemons and restart them if necessary.

8-18 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

DLPAR troubleshooting IBM Power Systems

• If the DLPAR operation fails, check: – The network connection between the LPAR and the HMC. • Use the ping command or the HMC's Test Network Connectivity task.

– Check the required daemons: • On the LPAR, check to see IBM.DRM is listed: lssrc -a | grep IBM.DRM • To refresh the RMC daemons in the LPAR, first do a clean stop: – To stop the daemons (LPAR). /usr/sbin/rsct/bin/rmcctrl –z – To start the daemons (LPAR) and enable remote client communications: /usr/sbin/rsct/bin/rmcctrl –A /usr/sbin/rsct/bin/rmcctrl –p

• On the HMC, check that the services are listed, and if not, reboot the HMC: monhmc -s rmc hmcshutdown –t now –r © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-18. DLPAR troubleshooting

AN113.0

Notes: Troubleshooting First, check the network connection between the LPAR and its HMC. Can they ping back and forth? Next, check the RMC daemons. These are rarely the cause of DLPAR issues, but it can happen. The visual above shows how to restart the RMC daemons on the LPAR. To restart the RMC daemons on the HMC, reboot it. The IBM.DRM daemon is the resource manager needed for DLPAR operations.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 8. Dynamic LPAR infrastructure

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-19

Student Notebook

List resources with lshwres command IBM Power Systems

• List hardware resource (lshwres) command: lshwres -r {resource} -m MSname –-level type \ –F attr1,attr2 –-header

• Examples for a managed system named lou: – List memory information: lshwres -r mem -m lou -–level lpar

– List processor information: lshwres -r proc -m lou -–level lpar

– List IO slot information: lshwres -r io –m lou –-rsubtype slot

– List only desired attributes: lshwres -r proc –m lou \ –F lpar_name,curr_proc_units --header

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-19. List resources with lshwres command

AN113.0

Notes: Using the lshwres HMC command You can use the lshwres command to view results of dynamic partition operations or to view current configurations before running chhwres commands. Here’s an example of the lshwres command to find out the DRC index for a specific I/O slot. In this example, on the managed system named max, the DRC index for the C5 slot that contains an Fibre Channel adapter is 21010205: hscroot@hmc> lshwres -r io -m max --rsubtype slot|grep C5 unit_phys_loc=U78AA.001.WZSG3GX,bus_id=517,phys_loc=C5,drc_index=21010205, lpar_id=none,slot_io_pool_id=none,description=Fibre Channel Serial Bus,feature_codes=none,pci_vendor_id=10DF,pci_device_id=F100,pci_subs_vendo r_id=1014,pci_subs_device_id=038A,pci_class=0C04,pci_revision_id=03,bus_gro uping=0,iop=0,parent_slot_drc_index=none,drc_name=U78AA.001.WZSG3GX-P1-C5

8-20 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

chhwres HMC command for DLPAR IBM Power Systems

• Change hardware resource (chhwres) command: chhwres -r {resource} -o {a|r|m} -t "T-LPAR" \ -p "S-LPAR“ -m MSname -q {#} -w {#}

• Examples for a managed system named lou: – Add 16 MB unit of memory: chhwres -r mem -o a -p LPAR1 -m lou -q 16 -w 0

– Move 1 processor from LPAR1 to LPAR2: chhwres -r proc -o m -p LPAR1 -t LPAR2 -m lou -q 1 -w 0

\

– Addition of I/O slot: chhwres -r io –-rsubtype slot -o a -p LPAR1 -m lou –l 21030003 -w 0

\

DRCindex © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-20. chhwres HMC command for DLPAR

AN113.0

Notes: You can use the chhwres command to perform dynamic partition operations. The visual above shows a subset of the options available for this command. For more information on the command options, log in to the HMC via SSH and use the man chhwres or chhwres --help commands. I/O slot operations and the DRC index To specify an exact I/O slot, you use the dynamic reconfiguration connector (DRC) index for a particular slot. Use the lshwres HMC command to find out what the DRC index is for a slot. The DRC index is not a static address and might change if the physical I/O hardware is reconfigured so always check the address first with lshwres before issuing a chhwres for dynamic I/O slot operations.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 8. Dynamic LPAR infrastructure

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-21

Student Notebook

Checkpoint IBM Power Systems

1. The upper and lower limits for dynamically adding and removing memory are bound by what two partition configuration settings? 2. True or False: Dynamically reallocating resources on a partition does not alter the contents of the active partition profile. 3. If a partition’s processor or memory resource is already at its maximum setting and you need to add more, what do you need to do? 4. What dynamic reconfiguration operations can be scheduled on the HMC?

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-21. Checkpoint

AN113.0

Notes:

8-22 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

Uempty

Exercise: Dynamic resource allocation IBM Power Systems

Unit exerc ise

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-22. Exercise: Dynamic resource allocation

AN113.0

Notes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Unit 8. Dynamic LPAR infrastructure

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

8-23

Student Notebook

Unit summary IBM Power Systems

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: • List the system requirements for dynamic logical partitioning (DLPAR) • Dynamically remove, add, and move processors, memory, and I/O slots to and from partitions • Perform operating system operations necessary to dynamically add and remove I/O slots • Use HMC commands to perform DLPAR operations and list hardware resources • Schedule DLPAR operations • Reinitialize RMC configuration • Troubleshoot DLPAR operation errors © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-23. Unit summary

AN113.0

Notes: • The DLPAR capabilities of the different operating systems vary. • Processors, memory, and I/O slots can be dynamically removed, added, and moved to and from partitions. - Quantities are bounded by minimum and maximum or desired and required settings. - Not all of the operating systems support all of the DLPAR operations. • Additional AIX commands are necessary when dynamically adding and removing I/O slots. • HMC commands can be used to perform DLPAR operations. • DLPAR operations can be scheduled on the HMC. • Troubleshooting DLPAR operation errors involves looking at the network configuration, RMC configuration, and validity of the operation.

8-24 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

AP

Appendix A. Checkpoint solutions Unit 1, "Introduction to partitioning" Solutions for Figure 1-34, "Checkpoint (1 of 3)," on page 1-47

Checkpoint solutions (1 of 3) IBM Power Systems

1. True or False: A partition is an independent operating environment. The answer is True.

2. What is it that makes logical partitioning different from physical partitioning? a. Resource assignments are flexible. b. Resources can be moved between partitions without a restart. c. Partitioning is not dependent on physical system building blocks. The answer is partitioning is not dependent on physical system building blocks.

3. Which of the following are true for dynamic partition operations? a. All AIX partitions on POWER6 and POWER7 processor-based systems are capable of dynamic resource allocations. b. Virtual I/O devices can be dynamically added or removed but not moved between partitions. c. Partitions do not need to be restarted to add, remove, or move resources. d. All of the above. The answer is all of the above. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Appendix A. Checkpoint solutions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

A-1

Student Notebook

Solutions for Figure 1-35, "Checkpoint (2 of 3)," on page 1-48

Checkpoint solutions (2 of 3) IBM Power Systems

4. List the types of resources that are configured in partitions. The answer is processors, memory, and I/O slots (including the HEA).

5. What system option provides the ability to order additional resources that can be activated when you need them? The answer is capacity on demand (CoD).

6. Which of the following are benefits of using partitions? a. Better management of resources across operating environments b. Isolate applications that were all running on one system c. Better high availability solution d. Manage operational costs by consolidating resources The answers are better management of resources across operating environments, isolate applications that were all running on one system, and manage operational costs by consolidating resources. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

A-2

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

AP

Solutions for Figure 1-36, "Checkpoint (3 of 3)," on page 1-49

Checkpoint solutions (3 of 3) IBM Power Systems

7. What is the system component that performs the resource allocation to partitions? The answer is the POWER Hypervisor. 8. What is the system component needed to configure partitions, configure CoD, and provide access to virtual consoles? The answer is the HMC, SDMC, or IVM. 9. What is the term used for the concept of allocating subprocessors to partitions? The answer is micro-partitioning.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Appendix A. Checkpoint solutions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

A-3

Student Notebook

Unit 2, "Hardware system overview" Solutions for Figure 2-52, "Checkpoint (1 of 2)," on page 2-59

Checkpoint solutions (1 of 2) IBM Power Systems

1. List the major components that make up an IBM Power Systems server. The answers are processors, memory, I/O slots, and expansion drawers.

2. What is the main difference between the Express and Enterprise Power models? The answer is the Enterprise servers include redundant components and concurrent repair for higher availability and protection of the system.

3. How many cores are available on POWER7 processor chips. The answer is the POWER7 is a multi-core processor, available with 4, 6, or 8 cores.

4. What is the TurboCore mode? The answer is TurboCore mode is a mechanism to increase the performance. It turns off half of the cores of the chip, thus, there are fewer cores running with a higher core-to-L3-cache ratio (twice the L3 cache per core available). © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

A-4

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

AP

Solutions for Figure 2-53, "Checkpoint (2 of 2)," on page 2-60

Checkpoint solutions (2 of 2) IBM Power Systems

5. List at least three functions of the flexible service processor. The answers are it provides system initialization, connects to the HMC, runs ASMI for setting system flags, and includes hardware error detection.

6. What is the EnergyScale technology? The answer is the EnergyScale provides collection of real-time server energy consumption. This data can be displayed by the IBM Systems Director Active Energy Manager.

7. What is a location code? The answer is the location code is a sequence of labels that, when followed in order, lead to the location of a device.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Appendix A. Checkpoint solutions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

A-5

Student Notebook

Unit 3, "Hardware Management Console" Solutions for Figure 3-90, "Topic 1: Checkpoint," on page 3-110

Topic 1: Checkpoint solutions IBM Power Systems

1.

Which of the following are functions of the HMC? a. Monitor TCP/IP network objects b. Capacity on demand activation c. Partition configuration d. Activate partitions

The answers are capacity on demand activation, partition configuration, and activate partitions. 2.

When might an HMC need to be configured as a DHCP server? The answer is when it is on a private network and there is no other DHCP server.

3.

How is the HMC connected to its managed system? The answer is the connection uses Ethernet.

4.

True or False: One HMC can manage multiple managed systems. The answer is True. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

A-6

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

AP

Solutions for Figure 3-118, "Topic 2: Checkpoint," on page 3-143

Topic 2: Checkpoint solutions IBM Power Systems

1. Which of the following statements about HMC users are true? a. b. c. d.

When you create an HMC user, it exists only on that HMC. Task roles describe the procedures that users can perform. You can set multiple task roles and multiple managed resource roles for a user. A user with a custom task role can be created which allows the user to access only the HMC command line and not the web browser user interface. The answers are when you create an HMC user, it exists only on that HMC, task roles describe the procedures that users can perform, and a user with a custom task role can be created which allows the user to access only the HMC command line and not the web browser user interface.

2. List HMC remote access options. The answers are remote web connection and SSH login.

3. What must be configured to provide SSH access to the HMC command line? The answers are open firewall, enable SSH access from HMC Management Work pane, and install SSH on client.

4. True or False: The communication between a remote web browser and the HMC is SSL encrypted by default. The answer is True. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Appendix A. Checkpoint solutions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

A-7

Student Notebook

Solutions for Figure 3-119, "Checkpoint (1 of 2)," on page 3-144

Checkpoint solutions (1 of 2) IBM Power Systems

1. Which of the following statements are true? a. When you apply power to the managed system, the service processor searches for a DHCP server for its IP address. b. If it does not find a DHCP server, it waits for one to contact it. c. The IP address for the service processor can be set to any valid IP address. d. The network configuration for the service processor can be changed in the ASMI application. The answers are when you apply power to the managed system, the service processor searches for a DHCP server for its IP address, the IP address for the service processor can be set to any valid IP address, and the network configuration for the service processor can be changed in the ASMI application.

2. True or False: An important part of setting up the managed system connection to the HMC is to not apply power to the managed system until the HMC is configured. The answer is True. 3. True or False: The virtual console communications are encrypted. The answer is True. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

A-8

PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

AP

Solutions for Figure 3-120, "Checkpoint (2 of 2)," on page 3-145

Checkpoint solutions (2 of 2) IBM Power Systems

4. How do you reboot the HMC remotely? The answer is use the Shutdown or Restart task from the HMC Management work pane, or log in with SSH to the HMC command line and type hmcshutdown –r –t now.

5. What is the difference between a user account and a task role? The answer is a user account is used to log in. A task role is a predefined set of access rights.

6. Besides the firewall options, what are the remote access options that can be enabled or disabled on the HMC V7? The answers are remote virtual console, SSH access, and remote web connection.

7. True or False: The HMC can be used as a fully functional Linux system. The answer is False. The HMC allows only restricted shell access to a reduced set of Linux commands. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Appendix A. Checkpoint solutions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

A-9

Student Notebook

Unit 4, "Hardware Management Console maintenance" Solutions for Figure 4-26, "Checkpoint," on page 4-33

Checkpoint solutions IBM Power Systems

1. Can critical console data be restored on a different HMC? The answer is yes. Perform the installation/recovery process. 2. True or False: Performing a Backup Critical Console Data backs up all partition configuration data. The answer is true because it saves the profile data backup files. Even if you do not perform any profile data backup operation, there is one automatic file named backupFile. 3. From where is your HMC configuration information restored during the upgrade process? The answer is from the special area on the HMC disk (if you remembered the Save Upgrade Data step). 4. From where is your HMC configuration data restored during the installation/recovery process? The answer is your Backup Critical Console Data DVD-RAM, or from a remote system using NFS or FTP. 5. List two things that the Backup Critical Console Data option backs up. The answers include user configuration, user-preference files, platformconfiguration files, log files, and partition profile data backup files. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

A-10 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

AP

Unit 5, "System power management" Solutions for Figure 5-13, "Checkpoint," on page 5-16

Checkpoint solutions IBM Power Systems

1. List at least two methods of powering on the managed system. The answers include operator panel power button, ASMI, HMC command line, and HMC GUI application. 2. What are the different power on options for a managed system? The answers are normal. system profile, and hardware discovery. 3. Which option powers up the system using a predefined list of partition profiles? The answer is the system profile option. 4. What is the difference between normal and fast power off options? The answer is the normal option allows all active jobs to end in a controlled manner. Fast causes jobs to end without cleanup processing. 5. What HMC command can be used to power on or off the managed system? The answer is chsysstate. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Appendix A. Checkpoint solutions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

A-11

Student Notebook

Unit 6, "Planning and configuring logical partitions" Solutions for Figure 6-33, "Checkpoint (1 of 2)," on page 6-39

Checkpoint solutions (1 of 2) IBM Power Systems

1.

Match the terms minimum, desired, and maximum to the proper description: a. b. c.

This is the upper limit of processors or memory that cannot be exceeded when using dynamic operations. Maximum This is the lower limit of processors or memory when using dynamic operations. Minimum This is the amount of processors or memory that a partition receives if there are more than enough resources on the system when the partition is activated (starts). Desired

The answers are the upper limit of processors or memory that cannot be exceeded when using dynamic operations is the maximum, the lower limit of processors or memory when using dynamic operations is the minimum, and the amount of processors or memory that a partition receives if there are more than enough resources on the system when the partition is activated is the desired. 2.

True or False: The amount of desired processors must always be greater than or equal to the amount of minimum processors. The answer is True.

3.

What is the minimum amount of memory for an AIX partition? The answer is 128 MB or, if the LMB size of the partition is 256 MB, the minimum would be 256 MB.

4.

True or False: Empty I/O slots can be allocated to partitions. The answer is True.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

A-12 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

AP

Solutions for Figure 6-34, "Checkpoint (2 of 2)," on page 6-40

Checkpoint solutions (2 of 2) IBM Power Systems

5. What happens if the minimum (or required) amount of a resource is not available when a partition is activated? The answer is the partition will not start. 6. How many processors is a partition allocated if, when it starts, it has a minimum of three processors, desires five processors, and four processors are currently available on the system? The answer is it starts with four processors. 7. What happens if a partition is currently running with its three minimum processors but it desires five processors and another processor becomes available after the partition is started? The answer is nothing. 8. What is the granularity of allocating processor resources when configuring partitions? The answer is for dedicated processor partitions, allocations are made in units of 1. For partitions using the shared processor pool, allocations are made in units of 0.01, with a minimum allocation of 0.1 processing units. 9. When incrementing the amount of memory for a partition profile, the minimum unit is how much? The answer is it is the size of the LMB (16 MB – 256 MB). © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Appendix A. Checkpoint solutions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

A-13

Student Notebook

Unit 7, "Partition operations" Solutions for Figure 7-30, "Checkpoint (1 of 2)," on page 7-37

Checkpoint solutions (1 of 2) IBM Power Systems

1. How can you stop a partition? The answer is log in to a partition and shut down. Alternatively, use the HMC shut down menu option or the chsysstate command. 2. What states must the managed system be in to create partitions? The answer is standby or operating. 3. True or False: The last partition profile you create for a partition is automatically its default profile. The answer is False. The first one is the default. 4. When you modify a partition profile's configuration, what must you do to apply the new configuration to an active partition? The answer is shut down the partition and reactivate it. 5. True or False: If you delete a partition, you delete all of its partition profiles. The answer is True. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

A-14 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0 Student Notebook

AP

Solutions for Figure 7-31, "Checkpoint (2 of 2)," on page 7-38

Checkpoint solutions (2 of 2) IBM Power Systems

6. List at least two things you can do if a partition will not activate. The answers include use DLPAR to free up resources, reconfigure partitions, and use the managed system properties to determine current resource allocations. 7. Match the partition states to their definitions. States: Not activated, shutting down, running, not available a. b. c. d.

Shutting down Running Not activated Not available

The partition is in the process of stopping. The partition has been successfully activated. The partition is not running but is available to be activated. The system is in a state that prevents the partition from being activated (such as the managed system is powered off).

The answers, in the correct order, are shutting down, running, not activated, and not available. 8. True or False: When activating a partition, you must use the Open Terminal Window option. The answer is False. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Appendix A. Checkpoint solutions

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

A-15

Student Notebook

Unit 8, "Dynamic LPAR infrastructure" Solutions for Figure 8-21, "Checkpoint," on page 8-22

Checkpoint solutions IBM Power Systems

1. The upper and lower limits for dynamically adding and removing memory are bound by what two partition configuration settings? The answer is maximum and minimum settings in the active profile. 2. True or False: Dynamically reallocating resources on a partition does not alter the contents of the active partition profile. The answer is True. In addition to the DLPAR operation itself, if you want the change to occur the next time you activate the partition, make the change in the profile. 3. If a partition’s processor or memory resource is already at its maximum setting, and you need to add more, what do you need to do? The answer is shut down the partition, increase the maximum setting in the profile, and reactivate the partition. 4. What dynamic reconfiguration operations can be scheduled on the HMC? The answer is all DLPAR operations (add, move, and remove operations for processors, memory and I/O slots). © Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

A-16 PowerVM Virtualization I

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

V7.0

backpg

Back page